* agentexpr.texi: Fix typos.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdbint.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*- texinfo -*-
2 @setfilename gdbint.info
3 @include gdb-cfg.texi
4 @dircategory Software development
5 @direntry
6 * Gdb-Internals: (gdbint). The GNU debugger's internals.
7 @end direntry
8
9 @ifinfo
10 This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
11 Copyright (C) 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
12 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
13 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14 Contributed by Cygnus Solutions. Written by John Gilmore.
15 Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
16
17 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
18 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
19 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
20 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
21 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
22 Free Documentation License''.
23 @end ifinfo
24
25 @setchapternewpage off
26 @settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
27
28 @syncodeindex fn cp
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @titlepage
32 @title @value{GDBN} Internals
33 @subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
34 @author John Gilmore
35 @author Cygnus Solutions
36 @author Second Edition:
37 @author Stan Shebs
38 @author Cygnus Solutions
39 @page
40 @tex
41 \def\$#1${{#1}} % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
42 \xdef\manvers{\$Revision$} % For use in headers, footers too
43 {\parskip=0pt
44 \hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
45 \hfill \manvers\par
46 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
47 }
48 @end tex
49
50 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
51 Copyright @copyright{} 1990,1991,1992,1993,1994,1996,1998,1999,2000,2001,
52 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
53
54 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
55 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
56 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
57 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
58 Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
59 Free Documentation License''.
60 @end titlepage
61
62 @contents
63
64 @node Top
65 @c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
66 @c not for TeX). Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
67 @top Scope of this Document
68
69 This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}. It
70 includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
71 as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
72
73 @menu
74 * Requirements::
75 * Overall Structure::
76 * Algorithms::
77 * User Interface::
78 * libgdb::
79 * Symbol Handling::
80 * Language Support::
81 * Host Definition::
82 * Target Architecture Definition::
83 * Target Vector Definition::
84 * Native Debugging::
85 * Support Libraries::
86 * Coding::
87 * Porting GDB::
88 * Versions and Branches::
89 * Start of New Year Procedure::
90 * Releasing GDB::
91 * Testsuite::
92 * Hints::
93
94 * GDB Observers:: @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
95 * GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
96 * Index::
97 @end menu
98
99 @node Requirements
100
101 @chapter Requirements
102 @cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
103
104 Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
105 requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}. Although some
106 of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
107 that have run counter to these requirements.
108
109 First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger. It's not designed to be a
110 front panel for embedded systems. It's not a text editor. It's not a
111 shell. It's not a programming environment.
112
113 @value{GDBN} is an interactive tool. Although a batch mode is
114 available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
115 programmer.
116
117 @value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user. A programmer hot on
118 the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
119 going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
120 to debugger commands.
121
122 @value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
123 While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
124 picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
125 programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
126 mollify the debugger.
127
128 @value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
129 Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
130 heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
131
132 @value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere. No other debugger is
133 available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
134 supports.
135
136
137 @node Overall Structure
138
139 @chapter Overall Structure
140
141 @value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
142 symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
143 @dfn{target side}).
144
145 The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
146 supporting code.
147
148 The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
149 interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
150 parsing, type and value printing.
151
152 The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
153 physical target manipulation.
154
155 The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
156 number of exceptions. For instance, core file support involves symbolic
157 elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
158 supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers). Instead,
159 this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
160 should fit together.
161
162 @section The Symbol Side
163
164 The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
165 you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
166 For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
167 many kinds of expressions.
168
169 @section The Target Side
170
171 The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
172 Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
173 of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
174 available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
175
176 Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
177 display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all. In some cases,
178 such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
179 relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
180 way.
181
182 @section Configurations
183
184 @cindex host
185 @cindex target
186 @dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
187 @dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
188 executes. In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
189 third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
190
191 Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host support.
192 Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte order, host
193 float format.
194
195 Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
196 dependent. Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
197 breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
198 to call a function.
199
200 Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
201 is native dependent. One example is Unix child process support; if the
202 host and target are not the same, doing a fork to start the target
203 process is a bad idea. The various macros needed for finding the
204 registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
205 in the native-dependent files.
206
207 Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
208 are really part of the target environment, but which require
209 @code{#include} files that are only available on the host system. Core
210 file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
211
212 When you want to make @value{GDBN} work ``native'' on a particular machine, you
213 have to include all three kinds of information.
214
215 @section Source Tree Structure
216 @cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
217
218 The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
219 are only a few subdirectories. A file's name usually gives a hint as
220 to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
221 @file{dwarfread.c} reads DWARF, etc.
222
223 Files that are related to some common task have names that share
224 common substrings. For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
225 debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
226 reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
227 deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
228 parlance for the program being debugged).
229
230 There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
231 @samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
232 files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
233 (sparc, mips, etc). Usually, only one of these will be used in a
234 specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
235
236 Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
237 debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
238 native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
239
240 The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
241
242 @table @file
243 @item cli
244 Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
245 Interpreter. @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
246
247 @item gdbserver
248 Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
249
250 @item gdbtk
251 Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
252
253 @item mi
254 The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
255
256 @item signals
257 Target signal translation code.
258
259 @item tui
260 Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
261 Interface. @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
262 @end table
263
264 @node Algorithms
265
266 @chapter Algorithms
267 @cindex algorithms
268
269 @value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms. They are
270 often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
271 cases and real-world issues. This chapter describes the basic
272 algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
273 they use.
274
275 @section Frames
276
277 @cindex frame
278 @cindex call stack frame
279 A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
280 and called functions.
281
282 @cindex frame, unwind
283 @value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
284 need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind. In fact,
285 the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
286 Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
287 read the @sc{dwarf} specification.
288
289 @findex frame_register_unwind
290 @findex get_frame_register
291 @value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
292 ``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame. That is,
293 @samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
294 frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
295 #0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame). But then the
296 obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
297 frame itself?
298
299 @cindex sentinel frame
300 @findex get_frame_type
301 @vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
302 To answer this question, GDB has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
303 ``-1st'' frame. Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
304 the current values of the youngest real frame's registers. If @var{f}
305 is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) ==
306 SENTINEL_FRAME}.
307
308 @section Prologue Analysis
309
310 @cindex prologue analysis
311 @cindex call frame information
312 @cindex CFI (call frame information)
313 To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
314 variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
315 of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
316 saved. Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
317 younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
318 scattered unpredictably across younger frames. This means that
319 changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
320 may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
321
322 Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
323 which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
324 But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
325 technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
326 registers. A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
327 code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
328 allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
329 register, save registers, and so on. Obviously, this can't be done
330 accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
331 helpful. Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
332 CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
333 @value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
334 calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
335
336 In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
337 target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
338 optimizers. Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
339 write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
340 understand all the prologues GCC would generate. However, over time
341 GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
342 understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
343 themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
344 and fragile. Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
345 instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
346
347 @cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
348 @cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
349 @cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
350 To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
351 and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
352 prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
353 analyzers. When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
354 framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
355 ``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
356 using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
357 would hold when the code actually runs. For example, if our function
358 starts with the instruction:
359
360 @example
361 addi r1, 42 # add 42 to r1
362 @end example
363 @noindent
364 we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
365 this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
366 value.
367
368 If we then see an instruction like:
369
370 @example
371 addi r1, 22 # add 22 to r1
372 @end example
373 @noindent
374 we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
375 it is now 64 greater than its original value.
376
377 If the next instruction were:
378
379 @example
380 mov r2, r1 # set r2 to r1's value
381 @end example
382 @noindent
383 then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
384 @code{r1} plus 64.
385
386 It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
387 need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
388 registers. So after an instruction like this:
389
390 @example
391 mov (fp+4), r2
392 @end example
393 @noindent
394 then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
395 holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
396
397 And so on.
398
399 Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable. If we
400 wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
401 the instruction:
402
403 @example
404 xor r1, r3 # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
405 @end example
406 @noindent
407 then things would get pretty complex. But remember, we're just doing
408 a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
409 relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
410 ``unknown''. We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
411 information is acceptable for our application.
412
413 So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
414 approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
415 never inaccurate.
416
417 Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
418 machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
419 contents of registers and memory instead of actual values. Starting
420 from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
421 current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
422 Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
423 kept track of.
424
425 @itemize @bullet
426
427 @item
428 To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
429 stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
430 minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
431 If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
432 the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
433 we don't know the frame size.
434
435 @item
436 To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
437 search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
438 registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
439 original value. If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
440 to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
441 anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
442 @end itemize
443
444 This does take some work. But prologue analyzers aren't
445 quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
446 forms any more; they're big, hairy functions. Along with inferior
447 function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
448 of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port. So it's
449 worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
450 and maintain. In the approach described above:
451
452 @itemize @bullet
453
454 @item
455 It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
456 whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
457 the effect of each instruction.
458
459 @item
460 It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
461 instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
462 wasn't already broken before.
463
464 @item
465 It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
466 complicate the code for each instruction. As long as your domain
467 of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
468 what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
469 already gathering the right data for you.
470
471 @end itemize
472
473 The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
474 the framework and how to use it.
475
476
477 @section Breakpoint Handling
478
479 @cindex breakpoints
480 In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
481 where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
482 that location.
483
484 There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
485 breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
486
487 @cindex hardware breakpoints
488 @cindex program counter
489 Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
490 features with some chips. Typically these work by having dedicated
491 register into which the breakpoint address may be stored. If the PC
492 (shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
493 ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
494 exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
495
496 Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
497 include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
498 processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
499 address.
500
501 A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
502 breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
503 software breakpoints. So although these are not literally ``hardware
504 breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
505 @value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
506 for something to happen.
507
508 Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
509 limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
510 start trying to set software breakpoints. (On some architectures,
511 notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
512 whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
513 breakpoints and watchpoints. On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
514 an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
515
516 @cindex software breakpoints
517 Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
518 The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
519 instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
520 that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
521 @value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program. When the
522 user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
523 instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
524
525 Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
526 must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM. It
527 can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
528 although such a situation would be highly unusual.
529
530 Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
531 instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
532 target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
533 breakpoint instruction. (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
534 larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
535 targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
536 instructions may jumped to.) Note that it's possible for an instruction
537 set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
538 although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
539 instruction.
540
541 @findex BREAKPOINT
542 The basic definition of the software breakpoint is the macro
543 @code{BREAKPOINT}.
544
545 Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}. However,
546 much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
547
548 @table @code
549 @cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
550 @findex target_remove_breakpoint
551 @findex target_insert_breakpoint
552 @item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
553 @itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
554 Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
555 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
556 non-zero for failure. On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
557 breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero. The fields of the
558 @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
559 to contain other information about the breakpoint on output. The field
560 @code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
561 related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
562 contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
563 if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
564 underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
565 memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
566 @code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
567 it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
568
569 For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
570 shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero. However,
571 the length reported by @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC} is cached in
572 @code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
573 used to remove the breakpoint.
574
575 @cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
576 @findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
577 @findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
578 @item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
579 @itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
580 Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
581 @code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}. Returns zero for success,
582 non-zero for failure. See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
583 a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
584 @var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
585 @code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
586 but @code{placed_size} may be.
587 @end table
588
589 @section Single Stepping
590
591 @section Signal Handling
592
593 @section Thread Handling
594
595 @section Inferior Function Calls
596
597 @section Longjmp Support
598
599 @cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
600 @value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
601 @code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
602 stepping. This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
603 which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
604 command.
605
606 @findex GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
607 To make this work, you need to define a macro called
608 @code{GET_LONGJMP_TARGET}, which will examine the @code{jmp_buf}
609 structure and extract the longjmp target address. Since @code{jmp_buf}
610 is target specific, you will need to define it in the appropriate
611 @file{tm-@var{target}.h} file. Look in @file{tm-sun4os4.h} and
612 @file{sparc-tdep.c} for examples of how to do this.
613
614 @section Watchpoints
615 @cindex watchpoints
616
617 Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
618 breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
619 instruction is executed. When you have data which changes without
620 your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
621 hunt down and kill such bugs.
622
623 @cindex hardware watchpoints
624 @cindex software watchpoints
625 Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
626 known as ``software watchpoints.'' @value{GDBN} always uses
627 hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
628 software watchpoints otherwise. Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
629 will use software watchpoints are:
630
631 @itemize @bullet
632 @item
633 The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
634 watchpoint support. For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
635 to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
636 more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
637 watchpoints.
638
639 @item
640 The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
641 registers (as opposed to memory).
642
643 @item
644 Too many different watchpoints requested. (On some architectures,
645 this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
646 resumed.) Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
647 breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
648 breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
649
650 @item
651 No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
652 implementation.
653 @end itemize
654
655 Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
656 single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
657 watched expression(s) after each instruction. The rest of this
658 section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
659
660 When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
661 possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
662 For a data-write watchpoint, it does so by evaluating, for each
663 watchpoint, the expression whose value is being watched, and testing
664 whether the watched value has changed. For data-read and data-access
665 watchpoints, @value{GDBN} needs the target to supply a primitive that
666 returns the address of the data that was accessed or read (see the
667 description of @code{target_stopped_data_address} below): if this
668 primitive returns a valid address, @value{GDBN} infers that a
669 watchpoint triggered if it watches an expression whose evaluation uses
670 that address.
671
672 @value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
673 watchpoints:
674
675 @table @code
676 @findex TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
677 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
678 If defined, the target supports hardware watchpoints.
679
680 @findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
681 @item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
682 Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
683 possible to be set. The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
684 of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
685 not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
686 number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set. @var{other}
687 is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
688 are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
689 the same time).
690
691 @findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
692 @item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
693 Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
694 whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
695
696 @cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
697 @findex target_insert_watchpoint
698 @findex target_remove_watchpoint
699 @item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
700 @itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
701 Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
702 @var{len} bytes. @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
703 possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
704 defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
705
706 @smallexample
707 enum target_hw_bp_type
708 @{
709 hw_write = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
710 hw_read = 1, /* Read HW watchpoint */
711 hw_access = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
712 hw_execute = 3 /* Execute HW breakpoint */
713 @};
714 @end smallexample
715
716 @noindent
717 These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
718
719 @findex target_stopped_data_address
720 @item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
721 If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
722 associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
723 @var{addr_p} and return non-zero. Otherwise, return zero. Note that
724 this primitive is used by @value{GDBN} only on targets that support
725 data-read or data-access type watchpoints, so targets that have
726 support only for data-write watchpoints need not implement these
727 primitives.
728
729 @findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
730 @item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
731 If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
732 watchpoint to step over it.
733
734 @findex HAVE_NONSTEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
735 @item HAVE_NONSTEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
736 If defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
737 watchpoint to step the inferior over it.
738
739 @findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
740 @item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
741 If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
742 inferior after a watchpoint has been hit.
743
744 @findex CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
745 @item CANNOT_STEP_HW_WATCHPOINTS
746 If this is defined to a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} will remove all
747 watchpoints before stepping the inferior.
748
749 @findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
750 @item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
751 Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint. @var{wait_status} is of
752 the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
753 Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
754 the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
755 type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
756 target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
757 the @var{wait_status} argument.
758
759 @value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
760 @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
761 determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
762 it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
763 @end table
764
765 @subsection x86 Watchpoints
766 @cindex x86 debug registers
767 @cindex watchpoints, on x86
768
769 The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
770 registers designed to facilitate debugging. @value{GDBN} provides a
771 generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
772 support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints. This
773 subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
774
775 To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
776 following:
777
778 @itemize @bullet
779 @findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
780 @item
781 Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
782 target-dependent headers.
783
784 @item
785 Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
786 defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
787
788 @item
789 Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
790 @code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}) or
791 @code{TDEPFILES} (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition, TDEPFILES}).
792
793 @item
794 Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
795 below. Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
796 which does the real work.
797 @end itemize
798
799 The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
800 debug registers. Values are copied between the mirror images and the
801 real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
802 provide:
803
804 @table @code
805 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
806 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
807 Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
808
809 @findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
810 @item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
811 Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
812
813 @findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
814 @item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
815 Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
816 number @var{idx}.
817
818 @findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
819 @item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
820 Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register. This value is
821 used immediately after it is returned by
822 @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
823 register values.
824 @end table
825
826 For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
827 that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
828 to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints. This
829 allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
830 expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
831 wasting debug registers which are in short supply. @value{GDBN}
832 maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
833 anything to use this feature.
834
835 The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
836 bytes long. The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
837 be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
838 region on 4-byte boundary. However, the x86 watchpoint support in
839 @value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
840 bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
841 a single region. This allocation of several registers per a watched
842 region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
843
844 The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
845 @value{GDBN}'s application code:
846
847 @table @code
848 @findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
849 @item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
850 The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
851 this function. It counts the number of debug registers required to
852 watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
853 less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
854 processors.
855
856 @findex i386_stopped_data_address
857 @item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
858 The target function
859 @code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
860 This
861 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
862 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
863 macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
864 set in DR6.
865
866 @findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
867 @item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
868 The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
869 is set to call this function. The
870 argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored. This
871 function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
872 Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
873 macro, and returns true if any bit is set. Otherwise, false is
874 returned.
875
876 @findex i386_insert_watchpoint
877 @findex i386_remove_watchpoint
878 @item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
879 @itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
880 Insert or remove a watchpoint. The macros
881 @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
882 are set to call these functions. @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
883 looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
884 region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
885 reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
886 register sharing between watchpoints. If no such register is found,
887 the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
888 value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
889 register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
890 and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
891 inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
892 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If more than one debug register is
893 required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
894 each debug register.
895
896 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
897 in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
898 length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
899 values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
900 @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}. If a register is shared by several
901 watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
902 decrements the reference count, and only calls
903 @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
904 the count goes to zero.
905
906 @findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
907 @findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
908 @item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
909 @itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
910 These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints. The
911 macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
912 @code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
913 The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
914 the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
915 These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
916 @code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
917 the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
918 hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
919 register.
920
921 @findex i386_stopped_by_hwbp
922 @item i386_stopped_by_hwbp (void)
923 This function returns non-zero if the inferior has some watchpoint or
924 hardware breakpoint that triggered. It works like
925 @code{i386_stopped_data_address}, except that it doesn't record the
926 address whose watchpoint triggered.
927
928 @findex i386_cleanup_dregs
929 @item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
930 This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
931 bits in the mirror images of the debug registers. It doesn't affect
932 the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
933 @end table
934
935 @noindent
936 @strong{Notes:}
937 @enumerate 1
938 @item
939 x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
940 However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
941 @code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
942 watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
943 on x86.
944
945 @item
946 x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
947 only, or globally, for all the tasks. For each debug register,
948 there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
949 whether the associated address is watched locally or globally. The
950 current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
951 always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
952 watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
953 unavailable in many platforms.
954 @end enumerate
955
956 @section Checkpoints
957 @cindex checkpoints
958 @cindex restart
959 In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
960 the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
961
962 Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
963 whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
964 state at a later time. This can be expected to include the state of
965 registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
966 of open files and devices.
967
968 There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
969 in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
970 method implemented on the target side.
971
972 A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
973 state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
974 not typically include information about external entities such as
975 open files. Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
976
977 A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
978 as well as some subset of external (kernel) state. This method
979 is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
980 be used on other systems.
981
982 Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
983 method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
984 advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
985 details of how it is done.
986
987
988 @section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
989 @cindex observer pattern interface
990 @cindex notifications about changes in internals
991
992 In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
993 some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals. Traditionally, these
994 modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
995 hooks and gdb-events. Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
996 versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
997 @value{GDBN}. The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
998 a strong limitation.
999
1000 A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1001 Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented. The goal was to provide
1002 a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1003 previously available. This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1004 easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1005 interface when adding new notifications.
1006
1007 See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1008 currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1009 implementation is also briefly discussed.
1010
1011 @node User Interface
1012
1013 @chapter User Interface
1014
1015 @value{GDBN} has several user interfaces. Although the command-line interface
1016 is the most common and most familiar, there are others.
1017
1018 @section Command Interpreter
1019
1020 @cindex command interpreter
1021 @cindex CLI
1022 The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple. It is designed to
1023 allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1024 has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1025 a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1026
1027 For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1028 @code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1029 to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1030
1031 @findex add_cmd
1032 @findex add_com
1033 To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}. @code{add_com} adds to
1034 the main command list, and should be used for those commands. The usual
1035 place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1036 the ends of most source files.
1037
1038 @findex add_setshow_cmd
1039 @findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1040 To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1041 @code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}. The former is
1042 a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1043 further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1044 the new command structures for manipulation.
1045
1046 @cindex deprecating commands
1047 @findex deprecate_cmd
1048 Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1049 deprecate them for some time. Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1050 aliases to set the deprecated flag. @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1051 @code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument. You can use the
1052 return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1053 command immediately after it is created.
1054
1055 The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1056 replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1057 @code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1058 entire string the user should type at the command line.
1059
1060 @section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1061 @c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1062 @c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1063
1064 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1065 The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1066 @value{GDBN} output code. They hide the specifics of different user
1067 interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1068 from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1069 every UI, to produce output.
1070
1071 @subsection Overview and Terminology
1072
1073 In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1074 of output, and can even generate an input request.
1075
1076 Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1077
1078 @itemize @bullet
1079 @item
1080 to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1081
1082 @item
1083 to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1084 operation;
1085
1086 @item
1087 to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1088 progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1089
1090 @item
1091 to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1092
1093 @item
1094 to show @emph{debug data};
1095
1096 @item
1097 to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1098 @end itemize
1099
1100 @noindent
1101 This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1102 although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1103
1104 Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1105 involves one or more of the following:
1106
1107 @itemize @bullet
1108 @item
1109 output of the actual data
1110
1111 @item
1112 formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1113 easily readable by humans
1114
1115 @item
1116 machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1117 parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1118
1119 @item
1120 annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1121 parts in the output
1122 @end itemize
1123
1124 The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1125 Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines. Note that use
1126 of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1127 deprecated.
1128
1129 Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1130 a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1131 non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1132 header and a body. In a BNF-like form:
1133
1134 @table @code
1135 @item <table> @expansion{}
1136 @code{<header> <body>}
1137 @item <header> @expansion{}
1138 @code{@{ <column> @}}
1139 @item <column> @expansion{}
1140 @code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1141 @item <body> @expansion{}
1142 @code{@{<row>@}}
1143 @end table
1144
1145
1146 @subsection General Conventions
1147
1148 Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1149 @code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1150 object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1151
1152 The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1153 to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1154
1155 The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1156 When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1157 sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1158 format.
1159
1160 When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1161 call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1162
1163
1164 @subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1165
1166 @cindex list output functions
1167 @cindex table output functions
1168 @cindex tuple output functions
1169 This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1170 tuples and tables. The routines to output the actual data items
1171 (fields) are presented in the next section.
1172
1173 To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1174 containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1175 fields where each field describes an identical object.
1176
1177 Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1178 rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading. Use this
1179 even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1180
1181 @cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1182 Tables can not be nested. Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1183 maximum of five levels.
1184
1185 The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1186
1187 @smallexample
1188 ui_out_table_begin
1189 ui_out_table_header
1190 @dots{}
1191 ui_out_table_body
1192 ui_out_tuple_begin
1193 ui_out_field_*
1194 @dots{}
1195 ui_out_tuple_end
1196 @dots{}
1197 ui_out_table_end
1198 @end smallexample
1199
1200 Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1201 functions:
1202
1203 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1204 The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1205 of a table. It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1206 function for a given table. @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1207 the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1208 @var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table. The string
1209 pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1210 @code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1211 was @code{malloc}ed.
1212
1213 The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1214 the end of the table's output.
1215 @end deftypefun
1216
1217 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1218 @code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1219 table column. You call this function several times, one each for every
1220 column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1221 @code{ui_out_table_body}.
1222
1223 The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters. The
1224 value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1225 @code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1226 center, or right-justify it. @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1227 specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1228 column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1229 call.
1230 @end deftypefun
1231
1232 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1233 This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1234 @end deftypefun
1235
1236 @deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1237 This function signals the end of a table's output. It should be called
1238 after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1239 functions.
1240
1241 There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1242 call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1243 will signal an internal error.
1244 @end deftypefun
1245
1246 The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1247 call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1248 @code{ui_out_table_end}. You build a tuple by calling
1249 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1250 calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1251
1252 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1253 This function marks the beginning of a tuple output. @var{id} points
1254 to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1255 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1256 after the call.
1257 @end deftypefun
1258
1259 @deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1260 This function signals an end of a tuple output. There should be exactly
1261 one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1262 @code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1263 be signaled.
1264 @end deftypefun
1265
1266 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1267 This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1268 (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple. It provides a convenient
1269 and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1270 cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1271 @smallexample
1272 struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1273 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1274 old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1275 uiout);
1276 @end smallexample
1277 @end deftypefun
1278
1279 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1280 This function marks the beginning of a list output. @var{id} points to
1281 an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1282 implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1283 after the call.
1284 @end deftypefun
1285
1286 @deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1287 This function signals an end of a list output. There should be exactly
1288 one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1289 @code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1290 be signaled.
1291 @end deftypefun
1292
1293 @deftypefun struct cleanup *make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1294 Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1295 opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1296 that will close the list.list.
1297 @end deftypefun
1298
1299 @subsection Item Output Functions
1300
1301 @cindex item output functions
1302 @cindex field output functions
1303 @cindex data output
1304 The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1305 items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1306
1307 Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1308
1309 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1310 This is the most general output function. It produces the
1311 representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1312 according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1313 @code{printf}-like format string. The optional argument @var{fldname}
1314 supplies the name of the field. The data items themselves are
1315 supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1316
1317 This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1318 use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1319 @end deftypefun
1320
1321 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1322 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It uses the
1323 @code{"%d"} output conversion specification. @var{fldname} specifies
1324 the name of the field.
1325 @end deftypefun
1326
1327 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1328 This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable. It differs from
1329 @code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1330 @var{fldname} specifies
1331 the name of the field.
1332 @end deftypefun
1333
1334 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1335 This function outputs an address.
1336 @end deftypefun
1337
1338 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1339 This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1340 specification.
1341 @end deftypefun
1342
1343 Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1344 functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1345 @code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}. These functions accept an argument of
1346 the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1347 used to store the data stream used for the output. When you use one
1348 of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1349 @code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions. To this end,
1350 you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1351 @code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1352 @code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1353 and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1354 constructed. When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1355 you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1356 @code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1357
1358 @deftypefun struct ui_stream *ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1359 This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1360 same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1361 passed in @var{uiout}. It returns a pointer to the newly created
1362 @code{ui_stream} object.
1363 @end deftypefun
1364
1365 @deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1366 This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1367 @var{streambuf}.
1368 @end deftypefun
1369
1370 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1371 This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1372 @code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1373 @code{ui_out_field_string} does. After a call to
1374 @code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1375 the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1376 @end deftypefun
1377
1378 @strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1379 out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1380 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1381 cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources. Here's a
1382 skeleton code to do that:
1383
1384 @smallexample
1385 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1386 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1387 ...
1388 do_cleanups (old);
1389 @end smallexample
1390
1391 If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1392 of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1393
1394 @smallexample
1395 mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1396 make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1397 @end smallexample
1398
1399 Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1400 @code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1401 same buffer twice.
1402
1403 @subsection Utility Output Functions
1404
1405 @deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1406 This function skips a field in a table. Use it if you have to leave
1407 an empty field without disrupting the table alignment. The argument
1408 @var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1409 @end deftypefun
1410
1411 @deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1412 This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1413 easy to be read by humans. For example, the console implementation of
1414 this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1415 from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1416
1417 Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1418 the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1419 to the table's format. Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1420 string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1421 output short messages.
1422 @end deftypefun
1423
1424 @deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1425 This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces. It is handy to align the
1426 text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1427 list.
1428 @end deftypefun
1429
1430 @deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1431 This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1432 verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}. The
1433 current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1434 verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1435 setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1436 as zero. So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1437 argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1438 @end deftypefun
1439
1440 @deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1441 This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1442 of where to break lines which are too long. Ignored for all other
1443 output consumers. @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1444 be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1445 accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1446 explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions. If
1447 @var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1448 @end deftypefun
1449
1450 @deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1451 This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1452 the UI buffers output.
1453 @end deftypefun
1454
1455
1456 @subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1457
1458 @cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1459 @cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1460 This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1461 functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1462 @value{GDBN}. The examples all come from functions defined on the
1463 @file{breakpoints.c} file.
1464
1465 This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1466 produce a table.
1467
1468 The original code was:
1469
1470 @smallexample
1471 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1472 @{
1473 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1474
1475 annotate_field (0);
1476 printf_filtered ("Num ");
1477 annotate_field (1);
1478 printf_filtered ("Type ");
1479 annotate_field (2);
1480 printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1481 annotate_field (3);
1482 printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1483 if (addressprint)
1484 @{
1485 annotate_field (4);
1486 printf_filtered ("Address ");
1487 @}
1488 annotate_field (5);
1489 printf_filtered ("What\n");
1490
1491 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1492 @}
1493 @end smallexample
1494
1495 Here's the new version:
1496
1497 @smallexample
1498 nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1499
1500 if (addressprint)
1501 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1502 else
1503 ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1504
1505 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1506 annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1507 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1508 annotate_field (0);
1509 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num"); /* 1 */
1510 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1511 annotate_field (1);
1512 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type"); /* 2 */
1513 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1514 annotate_field (2);
1515 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp"); /* 3 */
1516 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1517 annotate_field (3);
1518 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb"); /* 4 */
1519 if (addressprint)
1520 @{
1521 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1522 annotate_field (4);
1523 if (TARGET_ADDR_BIT <= 32)
1524 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1525 else
1526 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1527 @}
1528 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1529 annotate_field (5);
1530 ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What"); /* 6 */
1531 ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1532 if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1533 annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1534 @end smallexample
1535
1536 This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1537 to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1538 in the above example. The original code was:
1539
1540 @smallexample
1541 annotate_record ();
1542 annotate_field (0);
1543 printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1544 annotate_field (1);
1545 if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1546 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1547 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1548 (int)b->type);
1549 printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1550 annotate_field (2);
1551 printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1552 annotate_field (3);
1553 printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1554 @dots{}
1555 @end smallexample
1556
1557 This is the new version:
1558
1559 @smallexample
1560 annotate_record ();
1561 ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1562 annotate_field (0);
1563 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1564 annotate_field (1);
1565 if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1566 || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1567 internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1568 (int) b->type);
1569 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1570 annotate_field (2);
1571 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1572 annotate_field (3);
1573 ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1574 @dots{}
1575 @end smallexample
1576
1577 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1578 produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1579 functions which requires a stream to be passed. It also shows how to
1580 automate stream destruction with cleanups. The original code was:
1581
1582 @smallexample
1583 annotate_field (5);
1584 print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1585 @end smallexample
1586
1587 The new version is:
1588
1589 @smallexample
1590 struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1591 struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1592 ...
1593 annotate_field (5);
1594 print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1595 ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1596 @end smallexample
1597
1598 This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1599 @code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original code
1600 was:
1601
1602 @smallexample
1603 annotate_field (5);
1604 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1605 printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1606 else
1607 printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1608 @end smallexample
1609
1610 It became:
1611
1612 @smallexample
1613 annotate_field (5);
1614 if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1615 @{
1616 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1617 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1618 @}
1619 else
1620 @{
1621 ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1622 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1623 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1624 @}
1625 @end smallexample
1626
1627 The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1628 use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}. The original
1629 code was:
1630
1631 @smallexample
1632 annotate_field (5);
1633 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1634 printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1635 @end smallexample
1636
1637 It became:
1638
1639 @smallexample
1640 annotate_field (5);
1641 if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1642 @{
1643 ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1644 ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1645 ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1646 @}
1647 @end smallexample
1648
1649 Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}. The original
1650 code was:
1651
1652 @smallexample
1653 annotate_field (5);
1654 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1655 printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1656 @end smallexample
1657
1658 It became:
1659
1660 @smallexample
1661 annotate_field (5);
1662 if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1663 @{
1664 ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1665 ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1666 ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1667 @}
1668 @end smallexample
1669
1670 Finally, here's an example of printing an address. The original code:
1671
1672 @smallexample
1673 annotate_field (4);
1674 printf_filtered ("%s ",
1675 hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1676 @end smallexample
1677
1678 It became:
1679
1680 @smallexample
1681 annotate_field (4);
1682 ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1683 @end smallexample
1684
1685
1686 @section Console Printing
1687
1688 @section TUI
1689
1690 @node libgdb
1691
1692 @chapter libgdb
1693
1694 @section libgdb 1.0
1695 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1696 @code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago. The theory was
1697 to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1698
1699 @section libgdb 2.0
1700 @cindex @code{libgdb}
1701 @code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1702 better able to support graphical and other environments.
1703
1704 Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1705 evolving. The following components have so far been identified:
1706
1707 @itemize @bullet
1708 @item
1709 Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1710 @item
1711 Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1712 @item
1713 Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1714 @item
1715 Library - @file{gdb.h}
1716 @end itemize
1717
1718 The model that ties these components together is described below.
1719
1720 @section The @code{libgdb} Model
1721
1722 A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1723
1724 @itemize @bullet
1725 @item
1726 As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1727 @code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1728 state, etc).
1729 @item
1730 As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1731 obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1732 @end itemize
1733
1734 Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1735 the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1736 controlling @code{libgdb}. In particular, a client must ensure that
1737 @code{libgdb} is idle (i.e. no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1738 before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1739
1740 @section CLI support
1741
1742 At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1743 @code{libgdb}. Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1744 their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1745 requirements.
1746
1747 It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1748 (alternate between CLI and client query modes). The notes below sketch
1749 out the theory:
1750
1751 @itemize @bullet
1752 @item
1753 The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1754 @item
1755 The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1756 versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1757 @code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1758 @item
1759 The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1760 used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1761 @end itemize
1762
1763 When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1764 along. Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1765 the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1766 through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1767 At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1768 virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1769
1770 The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1771 @code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1772 client's custom builder).
1773
1774 @section @code{libgdb} components
1775
1776 @subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1777 @file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1778 be used to implement an observer. At present it only allows for one
1779 observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1780 the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1781 finished the current command.
1782
1783 @subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1784 @file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1785 create a builder. That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1786 when doing any queries.
1787
1788 @subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1789 @c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1790 @file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1791 loop. A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1792 implement a new event-loop that GDB would use.
1793
1794 The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant. This is so that
1795 @value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1796 instead of returning.
1797
1798 @subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1799 @file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system. It provides
1800 the query interface. Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1801 builder. The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1802 before the query function returns.
1803
1804 @node Symbol Handling
1805
1806 @chapter Symbol Handling
1807
1808 Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation. Symbols include variables,
1809 functions, and types.
1810
1811 @section Symbol Reading
1812
1813 @cindex symbol reading
1814 @cindex reading of symbols
1815 @cindex symbol files
1816 @value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}. The usual symbol
1817 file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
1818 debugging. @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
1819 symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
1820 more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands, or while
1821 reading symbols from shared libraries.
1822
1823 @findex find_sym_fns
1824 Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
1825 the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}). BFD identifies the type
1826 of the file by examining its header. @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
1827 this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
1828
1829 @findex add_symtab_fns
1830 @cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
1831 @cindex adding a symbol-reading module
1832 Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
1833 @code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization. The argument
1834 to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
1835 name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
1836 and pointers to four functions. These functions are called at various
1837 times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
1838 prefix.
1839
1840 The functions supplied by each module are:
1841
1842 @table @code
1843 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
1844
1845 @cindex secondary symbol file
1846 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
1847 symbol file. This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
1848 resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
1849 read a new symbol file. Note that the symbol file which we are reading
1850 might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
1851 whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
1852
1853 The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
1854 @code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
1855 new symbol file being read. Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
1856 and can be modified as desired. Typically, a struct of private
1857 information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
1858 in the @code{private} field.
1859
1860 There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
1861 @code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
1862
1863 @item @var{xyz}_new_init()
1864
1865 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
1866 This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
1867 state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
1868 @value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}. It has no
1869 arguments and no result. It may be called after
1870 @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
1871 may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
1872
1873 @item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
1874
1875 Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
1876 symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
1877
1878 @code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
1879 @code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization. @code{addr} is
1880 the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
1881 address in memory. @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
1882 table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
1883 or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
1884 @end table
1885
1886 In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
1887 @var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
1888 to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
1889 from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
1890
1891 @table @code
1892 @item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
1893
1894 Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
1895 the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
1896 pointer set. The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
1897 symtab. Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
1898 @code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
1899 zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
1900 @end table
1901
1902 @section Partial Symbol Tables
1903
1904 @value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
1905
1906 @itemize @bullet
1907 @cindex full symbol table
1908 @cindex symtabs
1909 @item
1910 Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}). These contain the main
1911 information about symbols and addresses.
1912
1913 @cindex psymtabs
1914 @item
1915 Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}). These contain enough
1916 information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
1917 symbol table.
1918
1919 @cindex minimal symbol table
1920 @cindex minsymtabs
1921 @item
1922 Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}). These contain information
1923 gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
1924 @end itemize
1925
1926 @cindex partial symbol table
1927 This section describes partial symbol tables.
1928
1929 A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
1930 file's debugging information. Small amounts of information are
1931 extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
1932 need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
1933 information. The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
1934 quickly. Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
1935 pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
1936 the user.
1937 @c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
1938
1939 The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
1940 visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
1941 that file. These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
1942 types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
1943
1944 The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
1945 full symbol table would represent.
1946
1947 @cindex finding a symbol
1948 @cindex symbol lookup
1949 The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
1950 code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
1951
1952 @itemize @bullet
1953 @findex find_pc_function
1954 @findex find_pc_line
1955 @item
1956 By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
1957 function in this file). The address will be noticed to be in the
1958 range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
1959 @code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
1960 @code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
1961
1962 @cindex lookup_symbol
1963 @item
1964 By its name
1965 (e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
1966 function). Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
1967 psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in. Local names will
1968 have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
1969 case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
1970 qualifier. Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
1971 local scope, in which case the first case applies. @code{lookup_symbol}
1972 does most of the work here.
1973 @end itemize
1974
1975 The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
1976 at the right moment. Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
1977 while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it. Since
1978 psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
1979 them anyway. Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
1980 either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
1981 name.
1982
1983 It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
1984 been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
1985 in. Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
1986 all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
1987 ranges.
1988
1989 The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
1990 thrown away after the symtab has been read in. The symtab should always
1991 be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
1992 bug-free environment). Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
1993 and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
1994 on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
1995 unless you want to do a lot more work.
1996
1997 @section Types
1998
1999 @unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2000
2001 @cindex fundamental types
2002 These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally. Fundamental
2003 types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2004 into one of these. They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2005 that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2006 knows about.
2007
2008 @unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2009
2010 @cindex type codes
2011 Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2012 of these types. The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2013 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2014 which is a pointer to another type. Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2015 types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2016 other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2017 or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2018
2019 @unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2020
2021 These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2022 fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2023 use for various ugly historical reasons. We eventually want to
2024 eliminate these. Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2025 initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2026 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2027 an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type. The difference is that the
2028 @code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2029 only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2030 @code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2031 some particular objfile.
2032
2033 @section Object File Formats
2034 @cindex object file formats
2035
2036 @subsection a.out
2037
2038 @cindex @code{a.out} format
2039 The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix. It
2040 consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2041 which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2042 respectively.
2043
2044 The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2045 place for debugging information. (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2046 @samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!) The only debugging
2047 format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2048 symbols with distinctive attributes.
2049
2050 The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2051
2052 @subsection COFF
2053
2054 @cindex COFF format
2055 The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2056 COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header. The
2057 number of sections is limited.
2058
2059 The COFF specification includes support for debugging. Although this
2060 was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited. For
2061 instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2062 included file.
2063
2064 The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2065
2066 @subsection ECOFF
2067
2068 @cindex ECOFF format
2069 ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2070 workstations.
2071
2072 The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2073
2074 @subsection XCOFF
2075
2076 @cindex XCOFF format
2077 The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2078 The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2079 symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2080 @code{.debug} section (rather than the string table). For more
2081 information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2082
2083 The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2084 shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2085 refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2086 relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable. At least
2087 using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2088 been run (or the core file has been read).
2089
2090 @subsection PE
2091
2092 @cindex PE-COFF format
2093 Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2094 executables. PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2095
2096 While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2097 COFF reader.
2098
2099 @subsection ELF
2100
2101 @cindex ELF format
2102 The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix. ELF is similar
2103 to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it removes
2104 many of COFF's limitations.
2105
2106 The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2107
2108 @subsection SOM
2109
2110 @cindex SOM format
2111 SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2112 SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2113
2114 The SOM reader is in @file{hpread.c}.
2115
2116 @subsection Other File Formats
2117
2118 @cindex Netware Loadable Module format
2119 Other file formats that have been supported by @value{GDBN} include Netware
2120 Loadable Modules (@file{nlmread.c}).
2121
2122 @section Debugging File Formats
2123
2124 This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2125 are independent of the object file format.
2126
2127 @subsection stabs
2128
2129 @cindex stabs debugging info
2130 @code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2131 format. Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2132 formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2133
2134 While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2135 including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2136 the real work.
2137
2138 @subsection COFF
2139
2140 @cindex COFF debugging info
2141 The basic COFF definition includes debugging information. The level
2142 of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2143
2144 @subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2145
2146 @cindex ECOFF debugging info
2147 ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2148
2149 The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2150
2151 @subsection DWARF 1
2152
2153 @cindex DWARF 1 debugging info
2154 DWARF 1 is a debugging format that was originally designed to be
2155 used with ELF in SVR4 systems.
2156
2157 @c GCC_PRODUCER
2158 @c GPLUS_PRODUCER
2159 @c LCC_PRODUCER
2160 @c If defined, these are the producer strings in a DWARF 1 file. All of
2161 @c these have reasonable defaults already.
2162
2163 The DWARF 1 reader is in @file{dwarfread.c}.
2164
2165 @subsection DWARF 2
2166
2167 @cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2168 DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2169
2170 The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2171
2172 @subsection SOM
2173
2174 @cindex SOM debugging info
2175 Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2176
2177 @section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2178
2179 @cindex adding debugging info reader
2180 If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2181 there is probably little to be done.
2182
2183 If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2184 BFD. This is beyond the scope of this document.
2185
2186 You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2187 debugging symbols. Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping routines
2188 from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the debugging
2189 information. As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not depend on the BFD
2190 internal data structures.
2191
2192 For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2193 to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2194 platforms have different sizes and layouts. Specialized routines that
2195 will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2196 directly. This interface should be described in a file
2197 @file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2198
2199 @section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2200
2201 Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2202 its @code{objfile_obstack}. This includes symbols, types,
2203 namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2204
2205 Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2206 released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded. Therefore one
2207 objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2208 they could be unloaded at different times.
2209
2210 User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types. Normally
2211 these types live in the associated objfile. However, when the objfile
2212 is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2213 the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2214
2215
2216 @node Language Support
2217
2218 @chapter Language Support
2219
2220 @cindex language support
2221 @value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2222 although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2223 manually.
2224
2225 @value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2226 of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2227 means Fortran, etc. It may also use a special-purpose language
2228 identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2229
2230 @section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2231
2232 @cindex adding source language
2233 To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2234 following steps:
2235
2236 @table @emph
2237 @item Create the expression parser.
2238
2239 @cindex expression parser
2240 This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}. Routines for
2241 building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2242 @file{parse.c}.
2243
2244 @cindex language parser
2245 Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2246 parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2247 @strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2248 various parsers from defining the same global names:
2249
2250 @smallexample
2251 #define yyparse @var{lang}_parse
2252 #define yylex @var{lang}_lex
2253 #define yyerror @var{lang}_error
2254 #define yylval @var{lang}_lval
2255 #define yychar @var{lang}_char
2256 #define yydebug @var{lang}_debug
2257 #define yypact @var{lang}_pact
2258 #define yyr1 @var{lang}_r1
2259 #define yyr2 @var{lang}_r2
2260 #define yydef @var{lang}_def
2261 #define yychk @var{lang}_chk
2262 #define yypgo @var{lang}_pgo
2263 #define yyact @var{lang}_act
2264 #define yyexca @var{lang}_exca
2265 #define yyerrflag @var{lang}_errflag
2266 #define yynerrs @var{lang}_nerrs
2267 @end smallexample
2268
2269 At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2270 initialize it with the right values for your language. Define an
2271 @code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2272 @samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2273 that your language exists. You'll need some other supporting variables
2274 and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2275 @code{@var{lang}_language_defn}. See the declaration of @code{struct
2276 language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2277 for more information.
2278
2279 @item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2280
2281 @cindex expression evaluation routines
2282 @findex evaluate_subexp
2283 @findex prefixify_subexp
2284 @findex length_of_subexp
2285 If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2286 add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}. Add support
2287 code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2288 defined in the file @file{eval.c}. Add cases
2289 for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2290 @code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}. These compute
2291 the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2292
2293 @item Update some existing code
2294
2295 Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2296 @code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2297
2298 Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2299 These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2300 are language dependent. If your language does not appear in the switch
2301 statement, an error is reported.
2302
2303 @vindex current_language
2304 Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2305 @code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2306 @code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2307 string.
2308
2309 @findex _initialize_language
2310 Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2311 language. This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2312 dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2313
2314 @findex allocate_symtab
2315 Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2316 code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2317 This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2318 Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2319 file. If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2320 information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2321 code.
2322
2323 @findex print_subexp
2324 @findex op_print_tab
2325 Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2326 expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}. Also, add the
2327 printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2328
2329 @item Add a place of call
2330
2331 @findex parse_exp_1
2332 Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2333 @code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2334
2335 @item Use macros to trim code
2336
2337 @cindex trimming language-dependent code
2338 The user has the option of building @value{GDBN} for some or all of the
2339 languages. If the user decides to build @value{GDBN} for the language
2340 @var{lang}, then every file dependent on @file{language.h} will have the
2341 macro @code{_LANG_@var{lang}} defined in it. Use @code{#ifdef}s to
2342 leave out large routines that the user won't need if he or she is not
2343 using your language.
2344
2345 Note that you do not need to do this in your YACC parser, since if @value{GDBN}
2346 is not build for @var{lang}, then @file{@var{lang}-exp.tab.o} (the
2347 compiled form of your parser) is not linked into @value{GDBN} at all.
2348
2349 See the file @file{configure.in} for how @value{GDBN} is configured
2350 for different languages.
2351
2352 @item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2353
2354 Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}. Make sure you update the macro
2355 variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2356 not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2357 distribution!
2358 @end table
2359
2360
2361 @node Host Definition
2362
2363 @chapter Host Definition
2364
2365 With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2366 definition machinery anymore. The following information is provided,
2367 mainly, as an historical reference.
2368
2369 @section Adding a New Host
2370
2371 @cindex adding a new host
2372 @cindex host, adding
2373 @value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2374 New host-specific definitions should not be needed. Older hosts
2375 @value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2376 below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2377 eventually disappear.
2378
2379 @table @file
2380 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2381 This file once contained both host and native configuration information
2382 (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the machine @var{xyz}. The host
2383 configuration information is now handed by Autoconf.
2384
2385 Host configuration information included a definition of
2386 @code{XM_FILE=xm-@var{xyz}.h} and possibly definitions for @code{CC},
2387 @code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2388 @code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2389
2390 New host only configurations do not need this file.
2391
2392 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h
2393 This file once contained definitions and includes required when hosting
2394 gdb on machine @var{xyz}. Those definitions and includes are now
2395 handled by Autoconf.
2396
2397 New host and native configurations do not need this file.
2398
2399 @emph{Maintainer's note: Some hosts continue to use the @file{xm-xyz.h}
2400 file to define the macros @var{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT},
2401 @var{HOST_DOUBLE_FORMAT} and @var{HOST_LONG_DOUBLE_FORMAT}. That code
2402 also needs to be replaced with either an Autoconf or run-time test.}
2403
2404 @end table
2405
2406 @subheading Generic Host Support Files
2407
2408 @cindex generic host support
2409 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2410 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
2411 defined in your @file{xm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
2412 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
2413 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{XDEPFILES}.
2414
2415 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
2416 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
2417 Put them into @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.c}, and put @code{@var{xyz}-xdep.o}
2418 into @code{XDEPFILES}.
2419
2420 @table @file
2421 @cindex remote debugging support
2422 @cindex serial line support
2423 @item ser-unix.c
2424 This contains serial line support for Unix systems. This is always
2425 included, via the makefile variable @code{SER_HARDWIRE}; override this
2426 variable in the @file{.mh} file to avoid it.
2427
2428 @item ser-go32.c
2429 This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2430 using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2431
2432 @cindex TCP remote support
2433 @item ser-tcp.c
2434 This contains generic TCP support using sockets.
2435 @end table
2436
2437 @section Host Conditionals
2438
2439 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2440 defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2441 attributes of the host system. These macros and their meanings (or if
2442 the meaning is not documented here, then one of the source files where
2443 they are used is indicated) are:
2444
2445 @ftable @code
2446 @item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2447 The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2448 @file{.gdbinit}).
2449
2450 @item NO_STD_REGS
2451 This macro is deprecated.
2452
2453 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2454 If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2455 of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2456
2457 @item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2458 Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2459 the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2460
2461 @item ALIGN_STACK_ON_STARTUP
2462 @cindex stack alignment
2463 Define this if your system is of a sort that will crash in
2464 @code{tgetent} if the stack happens not to be longword-aligned when
2465 @code{main} is called. This is a rare situation, but is known to occur
2466 on several different types of systems.
2467
2468 @item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2469 @cindex DOS text files
2470 Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2471 line terminator. This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2472 characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2473 which are ``sourced'' by gdb. It must be possible to open files in binary
2474 mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2475
2476 @item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2477 @cindex prompt
2478 The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2479
2480 @item DEV_TTY
2481 @cindex terminal device
2482 The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2483
2484 @item FOPEN_RB
2485 Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2486
2487 @item HAVE_MMAP
2488 @findex mmap
2489 In some cases, use the system call @code{mmap} for reading symbol
2490 tables. For some machines this allows for sharing and quick updates.
2491
2492 @item HAVE_TERMIO
2493 Define this if the host system has @code{termio.h}.
2494
2495 @item INT_MAX
2496 @itemx INT_MIN
2497 @itemx LONG_MAX
2498 @itemx UINT_MAX
2499 @itemx ULONG_MAX
2500 Values for host-side constants.
2501
2502 @item ISATTY
2503 Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2504
2505 @item LONGEST
2506 This is the longest integer type available on the host. If not defined,
2507 it will default to @code{long long} or @code{long}, depending on
2508 @code{CC_HAS_LONG_LONG}.
2509
2510 @item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2511 @cindex @code{long long} data type
2512 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}. This is set
2513 by the @code{configure} script.
2514
2515 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2516 Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2517 the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}. This is set by the
2518 @code{configure} script.
2519
2520 @item HAVE_LONG_DOUBLE
2521 Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long double}. This is
2522 set by the @code{configure} script.
2523
2524 @item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2525 Define this if the host can handle printing of long double float-point
2526 numbers via the printf format conversion specifier @code{Lg}. This is
2527 set by the @code{configure} script.
2528
2529 @item SCANF_HAS_LONG_DOUBLE
2530 Define this if the host can handle the parsing of long double
2531 float-point numbers via the scanf format conversion specifier
2532 @code{Lg}. This is set by the @code{configure} script.
2533
2534 @item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2535 Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2536 @code{n} in the file. This is only used when reading source files. It
2537 is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2538
2539 @item L_SET
2540 This macro is used as the argument to @code{lseek} (or, most commonly,
2541 @code{bfd_seek}). FIXME, should be replaced by SEEK_SET instead,
2542 which is the POSIX equivalent.
2543
2544 @item NORETURN
2545 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as @code{volatile},
2546 that can be used in both the declaration and definition of functions to
2547 indicate that they never return. The default is already set correctly
2548 if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be defined.
2549
2550 @item ATTR_NORETURN
2551 If defined, this should be one or more tokens, such as
2552 @code{__attribute__ ((noreturn))}, that can be used in the declarations
2553 of functions to indicate that they never return. The default is already
2554 set correctly if compiling with GCC. This will almost never need to be
2555 defined.
2556
2557 @item SEEK_CUR
2558 @itemx SEEK_SET
2559 Define these to appropriate value for the system @code{lseek}, if not already
2560 defined.
2561
2562 @item STOP_SIGNAL
2563 This is the signal for stopping @value{GDBN}. Defaults to
2564 @code{SIGTSTP}. (Only redefined for the Convex.)
2565
2566 @item USG
2567 Means that System V (prior to SVR4) include files are in use. (FIXME:
2568 This symbol is abused in @file{infrun.c}, @file{regex.c}, and
2569 @file{utils.c} for other things, at the moment.)
2570
2571 @item lint
2572 Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2573
2574 @item volatile
2575 Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2576 @code{/**/}.
2577 @end ftable
2578
2579
2580 @node Target Architecture Definition
2581
2582 @chapter Target Architecture Definition
2583
2584 @cindex target architecture definition
2585 @value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2586 machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2587 with them.
2588
2589 The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2590 @code{struct gdbarch *}. The structure, and its methods, are generated
2591 using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2592
2593 @section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2594 @cindex OS ABI variants
2595
2596 @value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2597 ABIs. An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2598 variables in the target architecture definition. There are two major
2599 components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2600
2601 A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2602 (the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2603 OS ABI of that file. Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2604 to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2605 considered to be @dfn{specific}. A match from a specific sniffer
2606 overrides a match from a generic sniffer. Multiple sniffers for an
2607 architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2608 different operating systems which use the same basic file format. The
2609 OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2610 examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2611 sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2612
2613 @cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2614 A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2615 selected OS ABI. There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2616 for each BFD architecture.
2617
2618 The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{osabi.h}:
2619
2620 @table @code
2621
2622 @findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2623 @item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2624 The ABI of the inferior is unknown. The default @code{gdbarch}
2625 settings for the architecture will be used.
2626
2627 @findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2628 @item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2629 UNIX System V Release 4
2630
2631 @findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2632 @item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2633 GNU using the Hurd kernel
2634
2635 @findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2636 @item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2637 Sun Solaris
2638
2639 @findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2640 @item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2641 OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX
2642
2643 @findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2644 @item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2645 GNU using the Linux kernel
2646
2647 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2648 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2649 FreeBSD using the a.out executable format
2650
2651 @findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2652 @item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2653 FreeBSD using the ELF executable format
2654
2655 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2656 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2657 NetBSD using the a.out executable format
2658
2659 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2660 @item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2661 NetBSD using the ELF executable format
2662
2663 @findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2664 @item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2665 Windows CE
2666
2667 @findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2668 @item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2669 DJGPP
2670
2671 @findex GDB_OSABI_NETWARE
2672 @item GDB_OSABI_NETWARE
2673 Novell NetWare
2674
2675 @findex GDB_OSABI_ARM_EABI_V1
2676 @item GDB_OSABI_ARM_EABI_V1
2677 ARM Embedded ABI version 1
2678
2679 @findex GDB_OSABI_ARM_EABI_V2
2680 @item GDB_OSABI_ARM_EABI_V2
2681 ARM Embedded ABI version 2
2682
2683 @findex GDB_OSABI_ARM_APCS
2684 @item GDB_OSABI_ARM_APCS
2685 Generic ARM Procedure Call Standard
2686
2687 @end table
2688
2689 Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2690
2691 @deftypefun const char *gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2692 Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2693 @end deftypefun
2694
2695 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2696 Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2697 architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2698 @var{machine} and @var{osabi}. In most cases, a value of zero for the
2699 machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2700 will suffice.
2701 @end deftypefun
2702
2703 @deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2704 Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2705 BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2706 If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2707 be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2708 any architecture.
2709 @end deftypefun
2710
2711 @deftypefun enum gdb_osabi gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2712 Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2713 The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2714 be determined.
2715 @end deftypefun
2716
2717 @deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2718 Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2719 @code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}. If a handler
2720 corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2721 architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2722 with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2723 @end deftypefun
2724
2725 @section Initializing a New Architecture
2726
2727 Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
2728 via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} constant. The @code{gdbarch} is
2729 registered by a call to @code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from
2730 the file's @code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will
2731 be automatically called during @value{GDBN} startup. The arguments
2732 are a @sc{bfd} architecture constant and an initialization function.
2733
2734 The initialization function has this type:
2735
2736 @smallexample
2737 static struct gdbarch *
2738 @var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
2739 struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
2740 @end smallexample
2741
2742 The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
2743 architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
2744 have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
2745 value.
2746
2747 The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
2748 is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not. Then, it should
2749 search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
2750 return one if found. Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
2751 create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
2752
2753 Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
2754 architecture. Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
2755 defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
2756 However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
2757 so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
2758 defaults from @var{arches}.
2759
2760 @section Registers and Memory
2761
2762 @value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
2763 @value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
2764 block of memory. Each register may have a different size.
2765
2766 @value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
2767 compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
2768 that they do match up accurately. The only way to make this work is
2769 to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
2770 and to reflect that in the @code{REGISTER_NAME} and related macros.
2771
2772 @value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
2773
2774 @section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
2775 @cindex pointer representation
2776 @cindex address representation
2777 @cindex word-addressed machines
2778 @cindex separate data and code address spaces
2779 @cindex spaces, separate data and code address
2780 @cindex address spaces, separate data and code
2781 @cindex code pointers, word-addressed
2782 @cindex converting between pointers and addresses
2783 @cindex D10V addresses
2784
2785 On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
2786 indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
2787 whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to. On such
2788 machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
2789 However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
2790 address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
2791 identity, and allows a larger code address space.
2792
2793 For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
2794 instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
2795 actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions. However, since you can't
2796 jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
2797 full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
2798 If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
2799 then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
2800 However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
2801 low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
2802 zero---byte addresses waste two bits. So instead of byte addresses,
2803 the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
2804 refer to code. Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
2805 code space.
2806
2807 However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
2808 forms on the D10V. The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
2809 @code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
2810 @code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
2811
2812 (The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
2813 affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
2814 going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
2815
2816 To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
2817 one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
2818 byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
2819 of an address of a particular type of data. In the example above,
2820 @code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
2821 @code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
2822 @value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
2823 and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
2824
2825 Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
2826 processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly. Thus,
2827 each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
2828 distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
2829 clean up some architecture-independent code.
2830
2831 Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
2832
2833 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
2834 Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
2835 @var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
2836 appropriate for the current architecture. This yields an address
2837 @value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc. Note that
2838 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2839 inferior's.
2840
2841 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2842 extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
2843 @var{buf} and returns it. However, if the current architecture is the
2844 D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
2845 @var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
2846
2847 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2848 will signal an internal error.
2849 @end deftypefun
2850
2851 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2852 Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
2853 pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture. Note that
2854 @var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
2855 inferior's.
2856
2857 For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
2858 stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
2859 appropriate length in @var{buf}. However, if the current architecture
2860 is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
2861 a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
2862
2863 If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
2864 will signal an internal error.
2865 @end deftypefun
2866
2867 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
2868 Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
2869 as appropriate for the current architecture.
2870
2871 This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
2872 For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
2873 described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
2874 @end deftypefun
2875
2876 @deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2877 Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
2878 the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
2879 This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
2880 above for @code{store_typed_address}.
2881 @end deftypefun
2882
2883 Here are some macros which architectures can define to indicate the
2884 relationship between pointers and addresses. These have default
2885 definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
2886 simple unsigned byte addresses.
2887
2888 @deftypefn {Target Macro} CORE_ADDR POINTER_TO_ADDRESS (struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
2889 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
2890 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
2891 address the pointer refers to.
2892
2893 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2894 C@t{++} reference type.
2895 @end deftypefn
2896
2897 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void ADDRESS_TO_POINTER (struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
2898 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
2899 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
2900
2901 This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
2902 C@t{++} reference type.
2903 @end deftypefn
2904
2905 @section Address Classes
2906 @cindex address classes
2907 @cindex DW_AT_byte_size
2908 @cindex DW_AT_address_class
2909
2910 Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
2911 via the debug information. For example, some programming environments
2912 define addresses of several different sizes. If the debug information
2913 distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
2914 info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
2915 address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
2916 following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
2917 types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
2918 a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
2919
2920 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS (int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
2921 Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
2922 is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
2923 This function is normally called from within a symbol reader. See
2924 @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2925 @end deftypefn
2926
2927 @deftypefn {Target Macro} char *ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME (int @var{type_flags})
2928 Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
2929 its name.
2930 @end deftypefn
2931 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_to_TYPE_FLAGS (int @var{name}, int *var{type_flags_ptr})
2932 Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
2933 for that address class qualifier.
2934 @end deftypefn
2935
2936 Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
2937 the address class macros defined by default. Predicate
2938 macros are provided to detect when they are defined.
2939
2940 Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
2941 32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported. Furthermore,
2942 suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
2943 uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
2944 of these "short" pointers. The following functions could be defined
2945 to implement the address class macros:
2946
2947 @smallexample
2948 somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
2949 int dwarf2_addr_class)
2950 @{
2951 if (byte_size == 2)
2952 return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
2953 else
2954 return 0;
2955 @}
2956
2957 static char *
2958 somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
2959 @{
2960 if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
2961 return "short";
2962 else
2963 return NULL;
2964 @}
2965
2966 int
2967 somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
2968 int *type_flags_ptr)
2969 @{
2970 if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
2971 @{
2972 *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
2973 return 1;
2974 @}
2975 else
2976 return 0;
2977 @}
2978 @end smallexample
2979
2980 The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
2981 to indicate the presence of one of these "short" pointers. E.g, if
2982 the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is one of these
2983 short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following behavior:
2984
2985 @smallexample
2986 (gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
2987 type = int * @@short
2988 @end smallexample
2989
2990
2991 @section Raw and Virtual Register Representations
2992 @cindex raw register representation
2993 @cindex virtual register representation
2994 @cindex representations, raw and virtual registers
2995
2996 @emph{Maintainer note: This section is pretty much obsolete. The
2997 functionality described here has largely been replaced by
2998 pseudo-registers and the mechanisms described in @ref{Target
2999 Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3000 Representations}. See also @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs/,
3001 Bug Tracking Database} and
3002 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, ARI Index} for more
3003 up-to-date information.}
3004
3005 Some architectures use one representation for a value when it lives in a
3006 register, but use a different representation when it lives in memory.
3007 In @value{GDBN}'s terminology, the @dfn{raw} representation is the one used in
3008 the target registers, and the @dfn{virtual} representation is the one
3009 used in memory, and within @value{GDBN} @code{struct value} objects.
3010
3011 @emph{Maintainer note: Notice that the same mechanism is being used to
3012 both convert a register to a @code{struct value} and alternative
3013 register forms.}
3014
3015 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the virtual and
3016 raw representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3017 However, they do occasionally differ. For example:
3018
3019 @itemize @bullet
3020 @item
3021 The x86 architecture supports an 80-bit @code{long double} type. However, when
3022 we store those values in memory, they occupy twelve bytes: the
3023 floating-point number occupies the first ten, and the final two bytes
3024 are unused. This keeps the values aligned on four-byte boundaries,
3025 allowing more efficient access. Thus, the x86 80-bit floating-point
3026 type is the raw representation, and the twelve-byte loosely-packed
3027 arrangement is the virtual representation.
3028
3029 @item
3030 Some 64-bit MIPS targets present 32-bit registers to @value{GDBN} as 64-bit
3031 registers, with garbage in their upper bits. @value{GDBN} ignores the top 32
3032 bits. Thus, the 64-bit form, with garbage in the upper 32 bits, is the
3033 raw representation, and the trimmed 32-bit representation is the
3034 virtual representation.
3035 @end itemize
3036
3037 In general, the raw representation is determined by the architecture, or
3038 @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while the virtual representation
3039 can be chosen for @value{GDBN}'s convenience. @value{GDBN}'s register file,
3040 @code{registers}, holds the register contents in raw format, and the
3041 @value{GDBN} remote protocol transmits register values in raw format.
3042
3043 Your architecture may define the following macros to request
3044 conversions between the raw and virtual format:
3045
3046 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE (int @var{reg})
3047 Return non-zero if register number @var{reg}'s value needs different raw
3048 and virtual formats.
3049
3050 You should not use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} for a register
3051 unless this macro returns a non-zero value for that register.
3052 @end deftypefn
3053
3054 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3055 The size of register number @var{reg}'s raw value. This is the number
3056 of bytes the register will occupy in @code{registers}, or in a @value{GDBN}
3057 remote protocol packet.
3058 @end deftypefn
3059
3060 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (int @var{reg})
3061 The size of register number @var{reg}'s value, in its virtual format.
3062 This is the size a @code{struct value}'s buffer will have, holding that
3063 register's value.
3064 @end deftypefn
3065
3066 @deftypefn {Target Macro} struct type *DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (int @var{reg})
3067 This is the type of the virtual representation of register number
3068 @var{reg}. Note that there is no need for a macro giving a type for the
3069 register's raw form; once the register's value has been obtained, @value{GDBN}
3070 always uses the virtual form.
3071 @end deftypefn
3072
3073 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL (int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3074 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3075 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3076 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3077 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3078
3079 Note that @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} and
3080 @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3081 arguments in different orders.
3082
3083 You should only use @code{REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL} with registers
3084 for which the @code{REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE} macro returns a non-zero
3085 value.
3086 @end deftypefn
3087
3088 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW (struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3089 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to @var{type}, which
3090 should always be @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})}. The buffer
3091 at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw format; the macro should
3092 convert the value to virtual format, and place it at @var{to}.
3093
3094 Note that REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL and REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW take
3095 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3096 @end deftypefn
3097
3098
3099 @section Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3100 @cindex register representation
3101 @cindex memory representation
3102 @cindex representations, register and memory
3103 @cindex register data formats, converting
3104 @cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3105
3106 @emph{Maintainer's note: The way GDB manipulates registers is undergoing
3107 significant change. Many of the macros and functions referred to in this
3108 section are likely to be subject to further revision. See
3109 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/current/ari/, A.R. Index} and
3110 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/bugs, Bug Tracking Database} for
3111 further information. cagney/2002-05-06.}
3112
3113 Some architectures can represent a data object in a register using a
3114 form that is different to the objects more normal memory representation.
3115 For example:
3116
3117 @itemize @bullet
3118
3119 @item
3120 The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3121 floating-point registers.
3122
3123 @item
3124 The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers. The
3125 @code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80 bits
3126 when stored in a register.
3127
3128 @end itemize
3129
3130 In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3131 the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3132 the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3133 Interface.
3134
3135 For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3136 representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3137 However, they do occasionally differ. Your architecture may define the
3138 following macros to request conversions between the register and memory
3139 representations of a data type:
3140
3141 @deftypefn {Target Macro} int CONVERT_REGISTER_P (int @var{reg})
3142 Return non-zero if the representation of a data value stored in this
3143 register may be different to the representation of that same data value
3144 when stored in memory.
3145
3146 When non-zero, the macros @code{REGISTER_TO_VALUE} and
3147 @code{VALUE_TO_REGISTER} are used to perform any necessary conversion.
3148 @end deftypefn
3149
3150 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_TO_VALUE (int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3151 Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of type
3152 @var{type}. The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value in raw
3153 format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at @var{to}.
3154
3155 Note that @code{REGISTER_TO_VALUE} and @code{VALUE_TO_REGISTER} take
3156 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3157
3158 You should only use @code{REGISTER_TO_VALUE} with registers for which
3159 the @code{CONVERT_REGISTER_P} macro returns a non-zero value.
3160 @end deftypefn
3161
3162 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void VALUE_TO_REGISTER (struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3163 Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3164 raw format.
3165
3166 Note that @code{REGISTER_TO_VALUE} and @code{VALUE_TO_REGISTER} take
3167 their @var{reg} and @var{type} arguments in different orders.
3168
3169 You should only use @code{VALUE_TO_REGISTER} with registers for which
3170 the @code{CONVERT_REGISTER_P} macro returns a non-zero value.
3171 @end deftypefn
3172
3173 @deftypefn {Target Macro} void REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_TYPE (int @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3174 See @file{mips-tdep.c}. It does not do what you want.
3175 @end deftypefn
3176
3177
3178 @section Frame Interpretation
3179
3180 @section Inferior Call Setup
3181
3182 @section Compiler Characteristics
3183
3184 @section Target Conditionals
3185
3186 This section describes the macros that you can use to define the target
3187 machine.
3188
3189 @table @code
3190
3191 @item ADDR_BITS_REMOVE (addr)
3192 @findex ADDR_BITS_REMOVE
3193 If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
3194 really part of the address, then define this macro to expand into an
3195 expression that zeroes those bits in @var{addr}. This is only used for
3196 addresses of instructions, and even then not in all contexts.
3197
3198 For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
3199 2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
3200 instruction. Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
3201 boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
3202 address of the instruction. ADDR_BITS_REMOVE should filter out these
3203 bits with an expression such as @code{((addr) & ~3)}.
3204
3205 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS (@var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
3206 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS
3207 If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
3208 referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
3209 and return 1. If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
3210 return 0.
3211
3212 The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
3213 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
3214 possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
3215 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3216
3217 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS_P ()
3218 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS_P
3219 Predicate which indicates whether @code{ADDRESS_CLASS_NAME_TO_TYPE_FLAGS}
3220 has been defined.
3221
3222 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS (@var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3223 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS (@var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3224 Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
3225 the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
3226 used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class. The value
3227 returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
3228 @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
3229 values or'd together.
3230 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3231
3232 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_P ()
3233 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_P
3234 Predicate which indicates whether @code{ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS} has
3235 been defined.
3236
3237 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME (@var{type_flags})
3238 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME
3239 Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
3240 flags given by @var{type_flags}.
3241
3242 @item ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME_P ()
3243 @findex ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME_P
3244 Predicate which indicates whether @code{ADDRESS_CLASS_TYPE_FLAGS_TO_NAME} has
3245 been defined.
3246 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
3247
3248 @item ADDRESS_TO_POINTER (@var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
3249 @findex ADDRESS_TO_POINTER
3250 Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3251 @var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3252 This macro may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3253 C@t{++} reference type.
3254 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3255
3256 @item BELIEVE_PCC_PROMOTION
3257 @findex BELIEVE_PCC_PROMOTION
3258 Define if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
3259 parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
3260 original type, rather than the promoted type.
3261
3262 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3263 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
3264 Define this if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match the
3265 endianness of the target byte order. A value of 1 means that the bits
3266 are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
3267
3268 @item BREAKPOINT
3269 @findex BREAKPOINT
3270 This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
3271 memory where a breakpoint is set. Although it's common to use a trap
3272 instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
3273 pattern could be an invalid instruction. The breakpoint must be no
3274 longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
3275
3276 @code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
3277 @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC}.
3278
3279 @item BIG_BREAKPOINT
3280 @itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3281 @findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
3282 @findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
3283 Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
3284
3285 @code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
3286 favor of @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC}.
3287
3288 @item DEPRECATED_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT
3289 @itemx DEPRECATED_LITTLE_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT
3290 @itemx DEPRECATED_BIG_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT
3291 @findex DEPRECATED_BIG_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT
3292 @findex DEPRECATED_LITTLE_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT
3293 @findex DEPRECATED_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT
3294 Specify the breakpoint instruction sequence for a remote target.
3295 @code{DEPRECATED_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT},
3296 @code{DEPRECATED_BIG_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT} and
3297 @code{DEPRECATED_LITTLE_REMOTE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
3298 favor of @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC} (@pxref{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC}).
3299
3300 @item BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC (@var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
3301 @findex BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC
3302 @anchor{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC} Use the program counter to determine the
3303 contents and size of a breakpoint instruction. It returns a pointer to
3304 a string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
3305 length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
3306 counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
3307 breakpoint should be inserted.
3308
3309 Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
3310 not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
3311 instruction. The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
3312 instruction of the architecture.
3313
3314 Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
3315
3316 @item MEMORY_INSERT_BREAKPOINT (@var{bp_tgt})
3317 @itemx MEMORY_REMOVE_BREAKPOINT (@var{bp_tgt})
3318 @findex MEMORY_REMOVE_BREAKPOINT
3319 @findex MEMORY_INSERT_BREAKPOINT
3320 Insert or remove memory based breakpoints. Reasonable defaults
3321 (@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
3322 @code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
3323 provided so that it is not necessary to define these for most
3324 architectures. Architectures which may want to define
3325 @code{MEMORY_INSERT_BREAKPOINT} and @code{MEMORY_REMOVE_BREAKPOINT} will
3326 likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
3327 conventional manner.
3328
3329 It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
3330 custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
3331 @code{BREAKPOINT_FROM_PC} needs to read the target's memory for some
3332 reason.
3333
3334 @item ADJUST_BREAKPOINT_ADDRESS (@var{address})
3335 @findex ADJUST_BREAKPOINT_ADDRESS
3336 @cindex breakpoint address adjusted
3337 Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
3338 address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
3339 breakpoint placement. This method is not needed by most targets.
3340
3341 The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
3342 The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
3343 instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
3344 instruction or instruction bundle. When the processor executes
3345 one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
3346 in parallel.
3347
3348 In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
3349 from distinct source statements into the same bundle. The line number
3350 information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
3351 refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle. So,
3352 if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
3353 statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
3354 instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
3355 (Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
3356 in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
3357 at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
3358
3359 The FR-V's @code{ADJUST_BREAKPOINT_ADDRESS} method will adjust a
3360 breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
3361 the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
3362
3363 Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
3364 expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
3365 is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
3366
3367 @item CALL_DUMMY_LOCATION
3368 @findex CALL_DUMMY_LOCATION
3369 See the file @file{inferior.h}.
3370
3371 This method has been replaced by @code{push_dummy_code}
3372 (@pxref{push_dummy_code}).
3373
3374 @item CANNOT_FETCH_REGISTER (@var{regno})
3375 @findex CANNOT_FETCH_REGISTER
3376 A C expression that should be nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
3377 from an inferior process. This is only relevant if
3378 @code{FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS} is not defined.
3379
3380 @item CANNOT_STORE_REGISTER (@var{regno})
3381 @findex CANNOT_STORE_REGISTER
3382 A C expression that should be nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
3383 written to the target. This is often the case for program counters,
3384 status words, and other special registers. If this is not defined,
3385 @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
3386
3387 @item int CONVERT_REGISTER_P(@var{regnum})
3388 @findex CONVERT_REGISTER_P
3389 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} can represent data values in a
3390 non-standard form.
3391 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3392
3393 @item DECR_PC_AFTER_BREAK
3394 @findex DECR_PC_AFTER_BREAK
3395 Define this to be the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
3396 program encounters a breakpoint. This is often the number of bytes in
3397 @code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always. For most targets this value will be 0.
3398
3399 @item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
3400 @findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
3401 If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
3402 library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
3403
3404 @item PRINT_FLOAT_INFO()
3405 @findex PRINT_FLOAT_INFO
3406 If defined, then the @samp{info float} command will print information about
3407 the processor's floating point unit.
3408
3409 @item print_registers_info (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{all})
3410 @findex print_registers_info
3411 If defined, pretty print the value of the register @var{regnum} for the
3412 specified @var{frame}. If the value of @var{regnum} is -1, pretty print
3413 either all registers (@var{all} is non zero) or a select subset of
3414 registers (@var{all} is zero).
3415
3416 The default method prints one register per line, and if @var{all} is
3417 zero omits floating-point registers.
3418
3419 @item PRINT_VECTOR_INFO()
3420 @findex PRINT_VECTOR_INFO
3421 If defined, then the @samp{info vector} command will call this function
3422 to print information about the processor's vector unit.
3423
3424 By default, the @samp{info vector} command will print all vector
3425 registers (the register's type having the vector attribute).
3426
3427 @item DWARF_REG_TO_REGNUM
3428 @findex DWARF_REG_TO_REGNUM
3429 Convert DWARF register number into @value{GDBN} regnum. If not defined,
3430 no conversion will be performed.
3431
3432 @item DWARF2_REG_TO_REGNUM
3433 @findex DWARF2_REG_TO_REGNUM
3434 Convert DWARF2 register number into @value{GDBN} regnum. If not
3435 defined, no conversion will be performed.
3436
3437 @item ECOFF_REG_TO_REGNUM
3438 @findex ECOFF_REG_TO_REGNUM
3439 Convert ECOFF register number into @value{GDBN} regnum. If not defined,
3440 no conversion will be performed.
3441
3442 @item END_OF_TEXT_DEFAULT
3443 @findex END_OF_TEXT_DEFAULT
3444 This is an expression that should designate the end of the text section.
3445 @c (? FIXME ?)
3446
3447 @item EXTRACT_RETURN_VALUE(@var{type}, @var{regbuf}, @var{valbuf})
3448 @findex EXTRACT_RETURN_VALUE
3449 Define this to extract a function's return value of type @var{type} from
3450 the raw register state @var{regbuf} and copy that, in virtual format,
3451 into @var{valbuf}.
3452
3453 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
3454 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
3455
3456 @item DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS(@var{regbuf})
3457 @findex DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS
3458 @anchor{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}
3459 When defined, extract from the array @var{regbuf} (containing the raw
3460 register state) the @code{CORE_ADDR} at which a function should return
3461 its structure value.
3462
3463 @xref{gdbarch_return_value}.
3464
3465 @item DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS_P()
3466 @findex DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS_P
3467 Predicate for @code{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}.
3468
3469 @item DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3470 @findex DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM
3471 If the virtual frame pointer is kept in a register, then define this
3472 macro to be the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3473
3474 This should only need to be defined if @code{DEPRECATED_TARGET_READ_FP}
3475 is not defined.
3476
3477 @item DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION(@var{fi})
3478 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAMELESS_FUNCTION_INVOCATION
3479 Define this to an expression that returns 1 if the function invocation
3480 represented by @var{fi} does not have a stack frame associated with it.
3481 Otherwise return 0.
3482
3483 @item frame_align (@var{address})
3484 @anchor{frame_align}
3485 @findex frame_align
3486 Define this to adjust @var{address} so that it meets the alignment
3487 requirements for the start of a new stack frame. A stack frame's
3488 alignment requirements are typically stronger than a target processors
3489 stack alignment requirements (@pxref{DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN}).
3490
3491 This function is used to ensure that, when creating a dummy frame, both
3492 the initial stack pointer and (if needed) the address of the return
3493 value are correctly aligned.
3494
3495 Unlike @code{DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN}, this function always adjusts the
3496 address in the direction of stack growth.
3497
3498 By default, no frame based stack alignment is performed.
3499
3500 @item int frame_red_zone_size
3501
3502 The number of bytes, beyond the innermost-stack-address, reserved by the
3503 @sc{abi}. A function is permitted to use this scratch area (instead of
3504 allocating extra stack space).
3505
3506 When performing an inferior function call, to ensure that it does not
3507 modify this area, @value{GDBN} adjusts the innermost-stack-address by
3508 @var{frame_red_zone_size} bytes before pushing parameters onto the
3509 stack.
3510
3511 By default, zero bytes are allocated. The value must be aligned
3512 (@pxref{frame_align}).
3513
3514 The @sc{amd64} (nee x86-64) @sc{abi} documentation refers to the
3515 @emph{red zone} when describing this scratch area.
3516 @cindex red zone
3517
3518 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN(@var{frame})
3519 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN
3520 Given @var{frame}, return a pointer to the calling frame.
3521
3522 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID(@var{chain}, @var{thisframe})
3523 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_CHAIN_VALID
3524 Define this to be an expression that returns zero if the given frame is an
3525 outermost frame, with no caller, and nonzero otherwise. Most normal
3526 situations can be handled without defining this macro, including @code{NULL}
3527 chain pointers, dummy frames, and frames whose PC values are inside the
3528 startup file (e.g.@: @file{crt0.o}), inside @code{main}, or inside
3529 @code{_start}.
3530
3531 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS(@var{frame})
3532 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS
3533 See @file{frame.h}. Determines the address of all registers in the
3534 current stack frame storing each in @code{frame->saved_regs}. Space for
3535 @code{frame->saved_regs} shall be allocated by
3536 @code{DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS} using
3537 @code{frame_saved_regs_zalloc}.
3538
3539 @code{FRAME_FIND_SAVED_REGS} is deprecated.
3540
3541 @item FRAME_NUM_ARGS (@var{fi})
3542 @findex FRAME_NUM_ARGS
3543 For the frame described by @var{fi} return the number of arguments that
3544 are being passed. If the number of arguments is not known, return
3545 @code{-1}.
3546
3547 @item DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC(@var{frame})
3548 @findex DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC
3549 @anchor{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC} Given @var{frame}, return the pc
3550 saved there. This is the return address.
3551
3552 This method is deprecated. @xref{unwind_pc}.
3553
3554 @item CORE_ADDR unwind_pc (struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
3555 @findex unwind_pc
3556 @anchor{unwind_pc} Return the instruction address, in @var{this_frame}'s
3557 caller, at which execution will resume after @var{this_frame} returns.
3558 This is commonly referred to as the return address.
3559
3560 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3561 is typically no more than:
3562
3563 @smallexample
3564 ULONGEST pc;
3565 frame_unwind_unsigned_register (this_frame, D10V_PC_REGNUM, &pc);
3566 return d10v_make_iaddr (pc);
3567 @end smallexample
3568
3569 @noindent
3570 @xref{DEPRECATED_FRAME_SAVED_PC}, which this method replaces.
3571
3572 @item CORE_ADDR unwind_sp (struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
3573 @findex unwind_sp
3574 @anchor{unwind_sp} Return the frame's inner most stack address. This is
3575 commonly referred to as the frame's @dfn{stack pointer}.
3576
3577 The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
3578 is typically no more than:
3579
3580 @smallexample
3581 ULONGEST sp;
3582 frame_unwind_unsigned_register (this_frame, D10V_SP_REGNUM, &sp);
3583 return d10v_make_daddr (sp);
3584 @end smallexample
3585
3586 @noindent
3587 @xref{TARGET_READ_SP}, which this method replaces.
3588
3589 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3590 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE
3591 For some COFF targets, the @code{x_sym.x_misc.x_fsize} field of the
3592 function end symbol is 0. For such targets, you must define
3593 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE_SIZE} to expand into the standard size of a
3594 function's epilogue.
3595
3596 @item DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3597 @findex DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET
3598 An integer, giving the offset in bytes from a function's address (as
3599 used in the values of symbols, function pointers, etc.), and the
3600 function's first genuine instruction.
3601
3602 This is zero on almost all machines: the function's address is usually
3603 the address of its first instruction. However, on the VAX, for
3604 example, each function starts with two bytes containing a bitmask
3605 indicating which registers to save upon entry to the function. The
3606 VAX @code{call} instructions check this value, and save the
3607 appropriate registers automatically. Thus, since the offset from the
3608 function's address to its first instruction is two bytes,
3609 @code{DEPRECATED_FUNCTION_START_OFFSET} would be 2 on the VAX.
3610
3611 @item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3612 @itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3613 @findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3614 @findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
3615 If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
3616 look for to detect that GCC compiled the file. The default symbols
3617 are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
3618 respectively. (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
3619
3620 @item @value{GDBN}_MULTI_ARCH
3621 @findex @value{GDBN}_MULTI_ARCH
3622 If defined and non-zero, enables support for multiple architectures
3623 within @value{GDBN}.
3624
3625 This support can be enabled at two levels. At level one, only
3626 definitions for previously undefined macros are provided; at level two,
3627 a multi-arch definition of all architecture dependent macros will be
3628 defined.
3629
3630 @item @value{GDBN}_TARGET_IS_HPPA
3631 @findex @value{GDBN}_TARGET_IS_HPPA
3632 This determines whether horrible kludge code in @file{dbxread.c} and
3633 @file{partial-stab.h} is used to mangle multiple-symbol-table files from
3634 HPPA's. This should all be ripped out, and a scheme like @file{elfread.c}
3635 used instead.
3636
3637 @item GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
3638 @findex GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
3639 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
3640 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
3641 the header file @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
3642
3643 This macro determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
3644 assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp} breakpoint. It takes a
3645 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
3646 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
3647
3648 @item DEPRECATED_GET_SAVED_REGISTER
3649 @findex DEPRECATED_GET_SAVED_REGISTER
3650 Define this if you need to supply your own definition for the function
3651 @code{DEPRECATED_GET_SAVED_REGISTER}.
3652
3653 @item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3654 @findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
3655 Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system. This
3656 conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
3657 feature-specific macros. It was introduced in a haste and we are
3658 repenting at leisure.
3659
3660 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
3661 An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
3662 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
3663
3664 @item SYMBOLS_CAN_START_WITH_DOLLAR
3665 @findex SYMBOLS_CAN_START_WITH_DOLLAR
3666 Some systems have routines whose names start with @samp{$}. Giving this
3667 macro a non-zero value tells @value{GDBN}'s expression parser to check for such
3668 routines when parsing tokens that begin with @samp{$}.
3669
3670 On HP-UX, certain system routines (millicode) have names beginning with
3671 @samp{$} or @samp{$$}. For example, @code{$$dyncall} is a millicode
3672 routine that handles inter-space procedure calls on PA-RISC.
3673
3674 @item DEPRECATED_INIT_EXTRA_FRAME_INFO (@var{fromleaf}, @var{frame})
3675 @findex DEPRECATED_INIT_EXTRA_FRAME_INFO
3676 If additional information about the frame is required this should be
3677 stored in @code{frame->extra_info}. Space for @code{frame->extra_info}
3678 is allocated using @code{frame_extra_info_zalloc}.
3679
3680 @item DEPRECATED_INIT_FRAME_PC (@var{fromleaf}, @var{prev})
3681 @findex DEPRECATED_INIT_FRAME_PC
3682 This is a C statement that sets the pc of the frame pointed to by
3683 @var{prev}. [By default...]
3684
3685 @item INNER_THAN (@var{lhs}, @var{rhs})
3686 @findex INNER_THAN
3687 Returns non-zero if stack address @var{lhs} is inner than (nearer to the
3688 stack top) stack address @var{rhs}. Define this as @code{lhs < rhs} if
3689 the target's stack grows downward in memory, or @code{lhs > rsh} if the
3690 stack grows upward.
3691
3692 @item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc})
3693 @findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
3694 Returns non-zero if the given @var{pc} is in the epilogue of a function.
3695 The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
3696 the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
3697 final `return from function call' instruction.
3698
3699 @item DEPRECATED_SIGTRAMP_START (@var{pc})
3700 @findex DEPRECATED_SIGTRAMP_START
3701 @itemx DEPRECATED_SIGTRAMP_END (@var{pc})
3702 @findex DEPRECATED_SIGTRAMP_END
3703 Define these to be the start and end address of the @code{sigtramp} for the
3704 given @var{pc}. On machines where the address is just a compile time
3705 constant, the macro expansion will typically just ignore the supplied
3706 @var{pc}.
3707
3708 @item IN_SOLIB_CALL_TRAMPOLINE (@var{pc}, @var{name})
3709 @findex IN_SOLIB_CALL_TRAMPOLINE
3710 Define this to evaluate to nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3711 trampoline that connects to a shared library.
3712
3713 @item IN_SOLIB_RETURN_TRAMPOLINE (@var{pc}, @var{name})
3714 @findex IN_SOLIB_RETURN_TRAMPOLINE
3715 Define this to evaluate to nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3716 trampoline that returns from a shared library.
3717
3718 @item IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE (@var{pc})
3719 @findex IN_SOLIB_DYNSYM_RESOLVE_CODE
3720 Define this to evaluate to nonzero if the program is stopped in the
3721 dynamic linker.
3722
3723 @item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
3724 @findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
3725 Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
3726 should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
3727 function. A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
3728 to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
3729 stepping will suffice.
3730
3731 @item INTEGER_TO_ADDRESS (@var{type}, @var{buf})
3732 @findex INTEGER_TO_ADDRESS
3733 @cindex converting integers to addresses
3734 Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
3735 conversions specially. Converts that value to an address according to
3736 the current architectures conventions.
3737
3738 @emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
3739 their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
3740 @code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
3741 computed by the target program. Any deviation from this rule can cause
3742 major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully. In
3743 other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
3744 conversions in clever and useful ways. It has, however, been pointed
3745 out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
3746 to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
3747 disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}. Adding an architecture
3748 method like @code{INTEGER_TO_ADDRESS} certainly makes it possible for
3749 @value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
3750
3751 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
3752 Addresses}.
3753
3754 @item NO_HIF_SUPPORT
3755 @findex NO_HIF_SUPPORT
3756 (Specific to the a29k.)
3757
3758 @item POINTER_TO_ADDRESS (@var{type}, @var{buf})
3759 @findex POINTER_TO_ADDRESS
3760 Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3761 appropriate format for the current architecture. Return the byte
3762 address the pointer refers to.
3763 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
3764
3765 @item REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE (@var{reg})
3766 @findex REGISTER_CONVERTIBLE
3767 Return non-zero if @var{reg} uses different raw and virtual formats.
3768 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3769
3770 @item REGISTER_TO_VALUE(@var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3771 @findex REGISTER_TO_VALUE
3772 Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
3773 @var{type}.
3774 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
3775
3776 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE (@var{reg})
3777 @findex DEPRECATED_REGISTER_RAW_SIZE
3778 Return the raw size of @var{reg}; defaults to the size of the register's
3779 virtual type.
3780 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3781
3782 @item register_reggroup_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, @var{reggroup})
3783 @findex register_reggroup_p
3784 @cindex register groups
3785 Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} is a member of the register
3786 group @var{reggroup}.
3787
3788 By default, registers are grouped as follows:
3789
3790 @table @code
3791 @item float_reggroup
3792 Any register with a valid name and a floating-point type.
3793 @item vector_reggroup
3794 Any register with a valid name and a vector type.
3795 @item general_reggroup
3796 Any register with a valid name and a type other than vector or
3797 floating-point. @samp{float_reggroup}.
3798 @item save_reggroup
3799 @itemx restore_reggroup
3800 @itemx all_reggroup
3801 Any register with a valid name.
3802 @end table
3803
3804 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE (@var{reg})
3805 @findex DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_SIZE
3806 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}; defaults to the size of the
3807 register's virtual type.
3808 Return the virtual size of @var{reg}.
3809 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3810
3811 @item DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE (@var{reg})
3812 @findex REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE
3813 Return the virtual type of @var{reg}.
3814 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3815
3816 @item struct type *register_type (@var{gdbarch}, @var{reg})
3817 @findex register_type
3818 If defined, return the type of register @var{reg}. This function
3819 supersedes @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_VIRTUAL_TYPE}. @xref{Target Architecture
3820 Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3821
3822 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3823 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
3824 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
3825 form.
3826 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3827
3828 @item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
3829 @findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
3830 Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
3831 form.
3832 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
3833
3834 @item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
3835 @findex regset_from_core_section
3836 Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
3837 @var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
3838
3839 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
3840 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
3841 Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
3842 mechanism. The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
3843
3844 @item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
3845 @findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
3846 A function that inserts or removes (depending on
3847 @var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
3848 the next instruction. See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
3849 for examples.
3850
3851 @item SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING
3852 @findex SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING
3853 Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
3854 debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
3855 them. So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
3856 address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
3857 linking faster.
3858
3859 @code{SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING} indicates that a particular set of
3860 hacks of this sort are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN}
3861 entries in stabs-format debugging information. @code{N_SO} stabs mark
3862 the beginning and ending addresses of compilation units in the text
3863 segment. @code{N_FUN} stabs mark the starts and ends of functions.
3864
3865 @code{SOFUN_ADDRESS_MAYBE_MISSING} means two things:
3866
3867 @itemize @bullet
3868 @item
3869 @code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero. Instead, you should find the
3870 addresses where the function starts by taking the function name from
3871 the stab, and then looking that up in the minsyms (the
3872 linker/assembler symbol table). In other words, the stab has the
3873 name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place that carries
3874 the address.
3875
3876 @item
3877 @code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too. You just look at the
3878 @code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab,
3879 and guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from
3880 them.
3881 @end itemize
3882
3883 @item PC_LOAD_SEGMENT
3884 @findex PC_LOAD_SEGMENT
3885 If defined, print information about the load segment for the program
3886 counter. (Defined only for the RS/6000.)
3887
3888 @item PC_REGNUM
3889 @findex PC_REGNUM
3890 If the program counter is kept in a register, then define this macro to
3891 be the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register.
3892
3893 This should only need to be defined if @code{TARGET_READ_PC} and
3894 @code{TARGET_WRITE_PC} are not defined.
3895
3896 @item PARM_BOUNDARY
3897 @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
3898 If non-zero, round arguments to a boundary of this many bits before
3899 pushing them on the stack.
3900
3901 @item stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
3902 @findex stabs_argument_has_addr
3903 @findex DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR
3904 @anchor{stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this to return nonzero if a
3905 function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference instead of
3906 value.
3907
3908 This method replaces @code{DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR}
3909 (@pxref{DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR}).
3910
3911 @item PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3912 @findex PROCESS_LINENUMBER_HOOK
3913 A hook defined for XCOFF reading.
3914
3915 @item PROLOGUE_FIRSTLINE_OVERLAP
3916 @findex PROLOGUE_FIRSTLINE_OVERLAP
3917 (Only used in unsupported Convex configuration.)
3918
3919 @item PS_REGNUM
3920 @findex PS_REGNUM
3921 If defined, this is the number of the processor status register. (This
3922 definition is only used in generic code when parsing "$ps".)
3923
3924 @item DEPRECATED_POP_FRAME
3925 @findex DEPRECATED_POP_FRAME
3926 @findex frame_pop
3927 If defined, used by @code{frame_pop} to remove a stack frame. This
3928 method has been superseded by generic code.
3929
3930 @item push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{pc_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
3931 @findex push_dummy_call
3932 @findex DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS.
3933 @anchor{push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
3934 the inferior function onto the stack. In addition to pushing
3935 @var{nargs}, the code should push @var{struct_addr} (when
3936 @var{struct_return}), and the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
3937
3938 @var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
3939 function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
3940
3941 Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
3942
3943 This method replaces @code{DEPRECATED_PUSH_ARGUMENTS}.
3944
3945 @item CORE_ADDR push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr})
3946 @findex push_dummy_code
3947 @anchor{push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
3948 instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
3949 called function should return.
3950
3951 Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
3952 should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
3953 the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
3954
3955 By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
3956 (@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
3957 reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
3958
3959 This method replaces @code{CALL_DUMMY_LOCATION},
3960 @code{DEPRECATED_REGISTER_SIZE}.
3961
3962 @item REGISTER_NAME(@var{i})
3963 @findex REGISTER_NAME
3964 Return the name of register @var{i} as a string. May return @code{NULL}
3965 or @code{NUL} to indicate that register @var{i} is not valid.
3966
3967 @item DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR (@var{gcc_p}, @var{type})
3968 @findex DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR
3969 @anchor{DEPRECATED_REG_STRUCT_HAS_ADDR}Define this to return 1 if the
3970 given type will be passed by pointer rather than directly.
3971
3972 This method has been replaced by @code{stabs_argument_has_addr}
3973 (@pxref{stabs_argument_has_addr}).
3974
3975 @item SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS (@var{sp})
3976 @findex SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS
3977 @anchor{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS} Used in @samp{call_function_by_hand} to
3978 notify the target dependent code of the top-of-stack value that will be
3979 passed to the inferior code. This is the value of the @code{SP}
3980 after both the dummy frame and space for parameters/results have been
3981 allocated on the stack. @xref{unwind_dummy_id}.
3982
3983 @item SDB_REG_TO_REGNUM
3984 @findex SDB_REG_TO_REGNUM
3985 Define this to convert sdb register numbers into @value{GDBN} regnums. If not
3986 defined, no conversion will be done.
3987
3988 @item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
3989 @findex gdbarch_return_value
3990 @anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
3991 type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
3992 would use.
3993
3994 @value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
3995 @code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
3996 in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
3997 value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
3998 passed in as the function's first parameter.
3999
4000 If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
4001 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
4002 @var{regcache}.
4003
4004 If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
4005 non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
4006 @var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
4007 just returned function).
4008
4009 @xref{DEPRECATED_EXTRACT_STRUCT_VALUE_ADDRESS}, for a description of how
4010 return-values that use the struct convention are handled.
4011
4012 @emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
4013 store methods. By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
4014 the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place. If
4015 @value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
4016 instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
4017 return-value extract and store.}
4018
4019 @emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
4020 parameter, and such a parameter should not be added. If an architecture
4021 that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
4022 then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
4023 @var{function} should be pursued.}
4024
4025 @emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
4026 to the inner most frame. While replacing @var{regcache} with a
4027 @code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
4028 limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
4029
4030 @item SKIP_PERMANENT_BREAKPOINT
4031 @findex SKIP_PERMANENT_BREAKPOINT
4032 Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint. @value{GDBN} normally
4033 steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
4034 re-inserting the breakpoint. However, permanent breakpoints are
4035 hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
4036 doesn't work. Calling @code{SKIP_PERMANENT_BREAKPOINT} adjusts the processor's
4037 state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint. This
4038 macro does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
4039 of a branch or jump.
4040
4041 @item SKIP_PROLOGUE (@var{pc})
4042 @findex SKIP_PROLOGUE
4043 A C expression that returns the address of the ``real'' code beyond the
4044 function entry prologue found at @var{pc}.
4045
4046 @item SKIP_TRAMPOLINE_CODE (@var{pc})
4047 @findex SKIP_TRAMPOLINE_CODE
4048 If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
4049 the functions being called, then define this macro to return a new PC
4050 that is at the start of the real function.
4051
4052 @item SP_REGNUM
4053 @findex SP_REGNUM
4054 If the stack-pointer is kept in a register, then define this macro to be
4055 the number (greater than or equal to zero) of that register, or -1 if
4056 there is no such register.
4057
4058 @item STAB_REG_TO_REGNUM
4059 @findex STAB_REG_TO_REGNUM
4060 Define this to convert stab register numbers (as gotten from `r'
4061 declarations) into @value{GDBN} regnums. If not defined, no conversion will be
4062 done.
4063
4064 @item DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN (@var{addr})
4065 @anchor{DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN}
4066 @findex DEPRECATED_STACK_ALIGN
4067 Define this to increase @var{addr} so that it meets the alignment
4068 requirements for the processor's stack.
4069
4070 Unlike @ref{frame_align}, this function always adjusts @var{addr}
4071 upwards.
4072
4073 By default, no stack alignment is performed.
4074
4075 @item STEP_SKIPS_DELAY (@var{addr})
4076 @findex STEP_SKIPS_DELAY
4077 Define this to return true if the address is of an instruction with a
4078 delay slot. If a breakpoint has been placed in the instruction's delay
4079 slot, @value{GDBN} will single-step over that instruction before resuming
4080 normally. Currently only defined for the Mips.
4081
4082 @item STORE_RETURN_VALUE (@var{type}, @var{regcache}, @var{valbuf})
4083 @findex STORE_RETURN_VALUE
4084 A C expression that writes the function return value, found in
4085 @var{valbuf}, into the @var{regcache}. @var{type} is the type of the
4086 value that is to be returned.
4087
4088 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4089 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4090
4091 @item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4092 @findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4093 The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable. (Never defined in
4094 current sources.)
4095
4096 @item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4097 @findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4098 Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4099
4100 @item TARGET_CHAR_SIGNED
4101 @findex TARGET_CHAR_SIGNED
4102 Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4103 it should be unsigned.
4104
4105 The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4106 equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4107 character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4108 Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4109 on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4110
4111 @item TARGET_COMPLEX_BIT
4112 @findex TARGET_COMPLEX_BIT
4113 Number of bits in a complex number; defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_FLOAT_BIT}.
4114
4115 At present this macro is not used.
4116
4117 @item TARGET_DOUBLE_BIT
4118 @findex TARGET_DOUBLE_BIT
4119 Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4120
4121 @item TARGET_DOUBLE_COMPLEX_BIT
4122 @findex TARGET_DOUBLE_COMPLEX_BIT
4123 Number of bits in a double complex; defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_DOUBLE_BIT}.
4124
4125 At present this macro is not used.
4126
4127 @item TARGET_FLOAT_BIT
4128 @findex TARGET_FLOAT_BIT
4129 Number of bits in a float; defaults to @code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4130
4131 @item TARGET_INT_BIT
4132 @findex TARGET_INT_BIT
4133 Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4134
4135 @item TARGET_LONG_BIT
4136 @findex TARGET_LONG_BIT
4137 Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4138
4139 @item TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_BIT
4140 @findex TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_BIT
4141 Number of bits in a long double float;
4142 defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_DOUBLE_BIT}.
4143
4144 @item TARGET_LONG_LONG_BIT
4145 @findex TARGET_LONG_LONG_BIT
4146 Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_LONG_BIT}.
4147
4148 @item TARGET_PTR_BIT
4149 @findex TARGET_PTR_BIT
4150 Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to @code{TARGET_INT_BIT}.
4151
4152 @item TARGET_SHORT_BIT
4153 @findex TARGET_SHORT_BIT
4154 Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}.
4155
4156 @item TARGET_READ_PC
4157 @findex TARGET_READ_PC
4158 @itemx TARGET_WRITE_PC (@var{val}, @var{pid})
4159 @findex TARGET_WRITE_PC
4160 @anchor{TARGET_WRITE_PC}
4161 @itemx TARGET_READ_SP
4162 @findex TARGET_READ_SP
4163 @itemx TARGET_READ_FP
4164 @findex TARGET_READ_FP
4165 @findex read_pc
4166 @findex write_pc
4167 @findex read_sp
4168 @findex read_fp
4169 @anchor{TARGET_READ_SP} These change the behavior of @code{read_pc},
4170 @code{write_pc}, and @code{read_sp}. For most targets, these may be
4171 left undefined. @value{GDBN} will call the read and write register
4172 functions with the relevant @code{_REGNUM} argument.
4173
4174 These macros are useful when a target keeps one of these registers in a
4175 hard to get at place; for example, part in a segment register and part
4176 in an ordinary register.
4177
4178 @xref{unwind_sp}, which replaces @code{TARGET_READ_SP}.
4179
4180 @item TARGET_VIRTUAL_FRAME_POINTER(@var{pc}, @var{regp}, @var{offsetp})
4181 @findex TARGET_VIRTUAL_FRAME_POINTER
4182 Returns a @code{(register, offset)} pair representing the virtual frame
4183 pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}. If virtual frame pointers
4184 are not used, a default definition simply returns
4185 @code{DEPRECATED_FP_REGNUM}, with an offset of zero.
4186
4187 @item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4188 If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4189 watchpoints. @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4190 other related macros.
4191
4192 @item TARGET_PRINT_INSN (@var{addr}, @var{info})
4193 @findex TARGET_PRINT_INSN
4194 This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4195 instruction. It prints the instruction at address @var{addr} in
4196 debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes. If
4197 a target doesn't define its own printing routine, it defaults to an
4198 accessor function for the global pointer
4199 @code{deprecated_tm_print_insn}. This usually points to a function in
4200 the @code{opcodes} library (@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).
4201 @var{info} is a structure (of type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in
4202 @file{include/dis-asm.h} used to pass information to the instruction
4203 decoding routine.
4204
4205 @item struct frame_id unwind_dummy_id (struct frame_info *@var{frame})
4206 @findex unwind_dummy_id
4207 @anchor{unwind_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @code{struct
4208 frame_id} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
4209 frame. The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
4210 previously saved using @code{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4211 @xref{SAVE_DUMMY_FRAME_TOS}.
4212
4213 @item DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION (@var{gcc_p}, @var{type})
4214 @findex DEPRECATED_USE_STRUCT_CONVENTION
4215 If defined, this must be an expression that is nonzero if a value of the
4216 given @var{type} being returned from a function must have space
4217 allocated for it on the stack. @var{gcc_p} is true if the function
4218 being considered is known to have been compiled by GCC; this is helpful
4219 for systems where GCC is known to use different calling convention than
4220 other compilers.
4221
4222 This method has been deprecated in favour of @code{gdbarch_return_value}
4223 (@pxref{gdbarch_return_value}).
4224
4225 @item VALUE_TO_REGISTER(@var{type}, @var{regnum}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4226 @findex VALUE_TO_REGISTER
4227 Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of register
4228 @var{regnum}'s.
4229 @xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4230
4231 @item VARIABLES_INSIDE_BLOCK (@var{desc}, @var{gcc_p})
4232 @findex VARIABLES_INSIDE_BLOCK
4233 For dbx-style debugging information, if the compiler puts variable
4234 declarations inside LBRAC/RBRAC blocks, this should be defined to be
4235 nonzero. @var{desc} is the value of @code{n_desc} from the
4236 @code{N_RBRAC} symbol, and @var{gcc_p} is true if @value{GDBN} has noticed the
4237 presence of either the @code{GCC_COMPILED_SYMBOL} or the
4238 @code{GCC2_COMPILED_SYMBOL}. By default, this is 0.
4239
4240 @item OS9K_VARIABLES_INSIDE_BLOCK (@var{desc}, @var{gcc_p})
4241 @findex OS9K_VARIABLES_INSIDE_BLOCK
4242 Similarly, for OS/9000. Defaults to 1.
4243 @end table
4244
4245 Motorola M68K target conditionals.
4246
4247 @ftable @code
4248 @item BPT_VECTOR
4249 Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector. If
4250 not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
4251
4252 @item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
4253 Defaults to @code{1}.
4254
4255 @item NAME_OF_MALLOC
4256 @findex NAME_OF_MALLOC
4257 A string containing the name of the function to call in order to
4258 allocate some memory in the inferior. The default value is "malloc".
4259
4260 @end ftable
4261
4262 @section Adding a New Target
4263
4264 @cindex adding a target
4265 The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
4266
4267 @table @file
4268 @vindex TDEPFILES
4269 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{ttt}.mt
4270 Contains a Makefile fragment specific to this target. Specifies what
4271 object files are needed for target @var{ttt}, by defining
4272 @samp{TDEPFILES=@dots{}} and @samp{TDEPLIBS=@dots{}}. Also specifies
4273 the header file which describes @var{ttt}, by defining @samp{TM_FILE=
4274 tm-@var{ttt}.h}.
4275
4276 You can also define @samp{TM_CFLAGS}, @samp{TM_CLIBS}, @samp{TM_CDEPS},
4277 but these are now deprecated, replaced by autoconf, and may go away in
4278 future versions of @value{GDBN}.
4279
4280 @item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
4281 Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine. On
4282 some machines it doesn't exist at all. Sometimes the macros in
4283 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h} become very complicated, so they are implemented
4284 as functions here instead, and the macro is simply defined to call the
4285 function. This is vastly preferable, since it is easier to understand
4286 and debug.
4287
4288 @item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
4289 @itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
4290 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4291 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4292 @file{@var{ttt}-tdep.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use
4293 the same processor.
4294
4295 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h
4296 (@file{tm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains
4297 macro definitions about the target machine's registers, stack frame
4298 format and instructions.
4299
4300 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4301
4302 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h
4303 This often exists to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
4304 processor chip (registers, stack, etc.). If used, it is included by
4305 @file{tm-@var{ttt}.h}. It can be shared among many targets that use the
4306 same processor.
4307
4308 New targets do not need this file and should not create it.
4309
4310 @end table
4311
4312 If you are adding a new operating system for an existing CPU chip, add a
4313 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} file that describes the operating system
4314 facilities that are unusual (extra symbol table info; the breakpoint
4315 instruction needed; etc.). Then write a @file{@var{arch}/tm-@var{os}.h}
4316 that just @code{#include}s @file{tm-@var{arch}.h} and
4317 @file{config/tm-@var{os}.h}.
4318
4319
4320 @section Converting an existing Target Architecture to Multi-arch
4321 @cindex converting targets to multi-arch
4322
4323 This section describes the current accepted best practice for converting
4324 an existing target architecture to the multi-arch framework.
4325
4326 The process consists of generating, testing, posting and committing a
4327 sequence of patches. Each patch must contain a single change, for
4328 instance:
4329
4330 @itemize @bullet
4331
4332 @item
4333 Directly convert a group of functions into macros (the conversion does
4334 not change the behavior of any of the functions).
4335
4336 @item
4337 Replace a non-multi-arch with a multi-arch mechanism (e.g.,
4338 @code{FRAME_INFO}).
4339
4340 @item
4341 Enable multi-arch level one.
4342
4343 @item
4344 Delete one or more files.
4345
4346 @end itemize
4347
4348 @noindent
4349 There isn't a size limit on a patch, however, a developer is strongly
4350 encouraged to keep the patch size down.
4351
4352 Since each patch is well defined, and since each change has been tested
4353 and shows no regressions, the patches are considered @emph{fairly}
4354 obvious. Such patches, when submitted by developers listed in the
4355 @file{MAINTAINERS} file, do not need approval. Occasional steps in the
4356 process may be more complicated and less clear. The developer is
4357 expected to use their judgment and is encouraged to seek advice as
4358 needed.
4359
4360 @subsection Preparation
4361
4362 The first step is to establish control. Build (with @option{-Werror}
4363 enabled) and test the target so that there is a baseline against which
4364 the debugger can be compared.
4365
4366 At no stage can the test results regress or @value{GDBN} stop compiling
4367 with @option{-Werror}.
4368
4369 @subsection Add the multi-arch initialization code
4370
4371 The objective of this step is to establish the basic multi-arch
4372 framework. It involves
4373
4374 @itemize @bullet
4375
4376 @item
4377 The addition of a @code{@var{arch}_gdbarch_init} function@footnote{The
4378 above is from the original example and uses K&R C. @value{GDBN}
4379 has since converted to ISO C but lets ignore that.} that creates
4380 the architecture:
4381 @smallexample
4382 static struct gdbarch *
4383 d10v_gdbarch_init (info, arches)
4384 struct gdbarch_info info;
4385 struct gdbarch_list *arches;
4386 @{
4387 struct gdbarch *gdbarch;
4388 /* there is only one d10v architecture */
4389 if (arches != NULL)
4390 return arches->gdbarch;
4391 gdbarch = gdbarch_alloc (&info, NULL);
4392 return gdbarch;
4393 @}
4394 @end smallexample
4395 @noindent
4396 @emph{}
4397
4398 @item
4399 A per-architecture dump function to print any architecture specific
4400 information:
4401 @smallexample
4402 static void
4403 mips_dump_tdep (struct gdbarch *current_gdbarch,
4404 struct ui_file *file)
4405 @{
4406 @dots{} code to print architecture specific info @dots{}
4407 @}
4408 @end smallexample
4409
4410 @item
4411 A change to @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} to register this new
4412 architecture:
4413 @smallexample
4414 void
4415 _initialize_mips_tdep (void)
4416 @{
4417 gdbarch_register (bfd_arch_mips, mips_gdbarch_init,
4418 mips_dump_tdep);
4419 @end smallexample
4420
4421 @item
4422 Add the macro @code{GDB_MULTI_ARCH}, defined as 0 (zero), to the file@*
4423 @file{config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h}.
4424
4425 @end itemize
4426
4427 @subsection Update multi-arch incompatible mechanisms
4428
4429 Some mechanisms do not work with multi-arch. They include:
4430
4431 @table @code
4432 @item FRAME_FIND_SAVED_REGS
4433 Replaced with @code{DEPRECATED_FRAME_INIT_SAVED_REGS}
4434 @end table
4435
4436 @noindent
4437 At this stage you could also consider converting the macros into
4438 functions.
4439
4440 @subsection Prepare for multi-arch level to one
4441
4442 Temporally set @code{GDB_MULTI_ARCH} to @code{GDB_MULTI_ARCH_PARTIAL}
4443 and then build and start @value{GDBN} (the change should not be
4444 committed). @value{GDBN} may not build, and once built, it may die with
4445 an internal error listing the architecture methods that must be
4446 provided.
4447
4448 Fix any build problems (patch(es)).
4449
4450 Convert all the architecture methods listed, which are only macros, into
4451 functions (patch(es)).
4452
4453 Update @code{@var{arch}_gdbarch_init} to set all the missing
4454 architecture methods and wrap the corresponding macros in @code{#if
4455 !GDB_MULTI_ARCH} (patch(es)).
4456
4457 @subsection Set multi-arch level one
4458
4459 Change the value of @code{GDB_MULTI_ARCH} to GDB_MULTI_ARCH_PARTIAL (a
4460 single patch).
4461
4462 Any problems with throwing ``the switch'' should have been fixed
4463 already.
4464
4465 @subsection Convert remaining macros
4466
4467 Suggest converting macros into functions (and setting the corresponding
4468 architecture method) in small batches.
4469
4470 @subsection Set multi-arch level to two
4471
4472 This should go smoothly.
4473
4474 @subsection Delete the TM file
4475
4476 The @file{tm-@var{arch}.h} can be deleted. @file{@var{arch}.mt} and
4477 @file{configure.in} updated.
4478
4479
4480 @node Target Vector Definition
4481
4482 @chapter Target Vector Definition
4483 @cindex target vector
4484
4485 The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
4486 abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
4487 actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
4488 @value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
4489 each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
4490
4491 @menu
4492 * Managing Execution State::
4493 * Existing Targets::
4494 @end menu
4495
4496 @node Managing Execution State
4497 @section Managing Execution State
4498 @cindex execution state
4499
4500 A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
4501 stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
4502 manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
4503 inferior). Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
4504 active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
4505 when the target has exited or not yet started.
4506
4507 For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
4508 not create a running program. Neither registers nor memory are
4509 accessible until @code{run}. Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
4510 program can not continue executing. But in both cases @value{GDBN}
4511 remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
4512 are directed to the simulator.
4513
4514 A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
4515 onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
4516 @code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
4517 @code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
4518
4519 A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
4520 still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
4521 @code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}. Instead, it should
4522 call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
4523 in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
4524 after connection. It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
4525 time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
4526 @code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
4527 @code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
4528 @code{to_mourn_inferior}). The target should also make sure to call
4529 @code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
4530 target to inactive state.
4531
4532 @node Existing Targets
4533 @section Existing Targets
4534 @cindex targets
4535
4536 @subsection File Targets
4537
4538 Both executables and core files have target vectors.
4539
4540 @subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
4541
4542 @value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code
4543 that runs in the target system. @value{GDBN} provides several sample
4544 @dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
4545 systems for this purpose; they are named @file{*-stub.c}.
4546
4547 The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
4548 your target code. What follows is a discussion of integrating the
4549 SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
4550 program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
4551
4552 The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
4553 @code{trap_low}:
4554
4555 @enumerate
4556 @item
4557 %l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
4558
4559 @item
4560 traps are disabled;
4561
4562 @item
4563 you are in the correct trap window.
4564 @end enumerate
4565
4566 As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
4567 is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
4568 The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
4569 hardware trap vector. That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
4570 which is provided by the external environment. For instance, this could
4571 set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
4572 first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
4573
4574 For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
4575 ``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
4576 and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions. Anyway, this is all
4577 controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify. The most important
4578 trap for us is for @code{ta 1}. Without that, we can't single step or
4579 do breakpoints. Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
4580 of the debugger/stub.
4581
4582 From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
4583 They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
4584
4585 @subsection ROM Monitor Interface
4586
4587 @subsection Custom Protocols
4588
4589 @subsection Transport Layer
4590
4591 @subsection Builtin Simulator
4592
4593
4594 @node Native Debugging
4595
4596 @chapter Native Debugging
4597 @cindex native debugging
4598
4599 Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
4600
4601 @table @file
4602 @vindex NATDEPFILES
4603 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
4604 Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
4605 machine @var{xyz}. In particular, this lists the required
4606 native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
4607 Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
4608 @var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}. You can also
4609 define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
4610 @samp{NAT_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
4611
4612 @emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
4613 originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
4614 on machine @var{xyz}. While the file is no longer used for this
4615 purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains. Perhaps someone will
4616 eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
4617 suffix.}
4618
4619 @item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
4620 (@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}). Contains C
4621 macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
4622 child process control and core file support.
4623
4624 @item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
4625 Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
4626 this machine. On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
4627 @end table
4628
4629 There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
4630 various systems. These can be customized in various ways by macros
4631 defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file. If these routines work for
4632 the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
4633 @samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4634
4635 Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
4636 to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
4637 Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
4638 into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
4639
4640 @table @file
4641 @item inftarg.c
4642 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4643 processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
4644
4645 @item procfs.c
4646 This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
4647 processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
4648
4649 @item fork-child.c
4650 This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
4651 and exec'' to start up a child process.
4652
4653 @item infptrace.c
4654 This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
4655 the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
4656 @end table
4657
4658 @section Native core file Support
4659 @cindex native core files
4660
4661 @table @file
4662 @findex fetch_core_registers
4663 @item core-aout.c::fetch_core_registers()
4664 Support for reading registers out of a core file. This routine calls
4665 @code{register_addr()}, see below. Now that BFD is used to read core
4666 files, virtually all machines should use @code{core-aout.c}, and should
4667 just provide @code{fetch_core_registers} in @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} (or
4668 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} in @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h}).
4669
4670 @item core-aout.c::register_addr()
4671 If your @code{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file defines the macro
4672 @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR(addr, blockend, regno)}, it should be defined to
4673 set @code{addr} to the offset within the @samp{user} struct of @value{GDBN}
4674 register number @code{regno}. @code{blockend} is the offset within the
4675 ``upage'' of @code{u.u_ar0}. If @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR} is defined,
4676 @file{core-aout.c} will define the @code{register_addr()} function and
4677 use the macro in it. If you do not define @code{REGISTER_U_ADDR}, but
4678 you are using the standard @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you will need
4679 to define your own version of @code{register_addr()}, put it into your
4680 @code{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file, and be sure @code{@var{xyz}-nat.o} is in
4681 the @code{NATDEPFILES} list. If you have your own
4682 @code{fetch_core_registers()}, you may not need a separate
4683 @code{register_addr()}. Many custom @code{fetch_core_registers()}
4684 implementations simply locate the registers themselves.@refill
4685 @end table
4686
4687 When making @value{GDBN} run native on a new operating system, to make it
4688 possible to debug core files, you will need to either write specific
4689 code for parsing your OS's core files, or customize
4690 @file{bfd/trad-core.c}. First, use whatever @code{#include} files your
4691 machine uses to define the struct of registers that is accessible
4692 (possibly in the u-area) in a core file (rather than
4693 @file{machine/reg.h}), and an include file that defines whatever header
4694 exists on a core file (e.g., the u-area or a @code{struct core}). Then
4695 modify @code{trad_unix_core_file_p} to use these values to set up the
4696 section information for the data segment, stack segment, any other
4697 segments in the core file (perhaps shared library contents or control
4698 information), ``registers'' segment, and if there are two discontiguous
4699 sets of registers (e.g., integer and float), the ``reg2'' segment. This
4700 section information basically delimits areas in the core file in a
4701 standard way, which the section-reading routines in BFD know how to seek
4702 around in.
4703
4704 Then back in @value{GDBN}, you need a matching routine called
4705 @code{fetch_core_registers}. If you can use the generic one, it's in
4706 @file{core-aout.c}; if not, it's in your @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c} file.
4707 It will be passed a char pointer to the entire ``registers'' segment,
4708 its length, and a zero; or a char pointer to the entire ``regs2''
4709 segment, its length, and a 2. The routine should suck out the supplied
4710 register values and install them into @value{GDBN}'s ``registers'' array.
4711
4712 If your system uses @file{/proc} to control processes, and uses ELF
4713 format core files, then you may be able to use the same routines for
4714 reading the registers out of processes and out of core files.
4715
4716 @section ptrace
4717
4718 @section /proc
4719
4720 @section win32
4721
4722 @section shared libraries
4723
4724 @section Native Conditionals
4725 @cindex native conditionals
4726
4727 When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
4728 defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
4729 target systems are the same. These macros should be defined (or left
4730 undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
4731
4732 @table @code
4733
4734 @item CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4735 @findex CHILD_PREPARE_TO_STORE
4736 If the machine stores all registers at once in the child process, then
4737 define this to ensure that all values are correct. This usually entails
4738 a read from the child.
4739
4740 [Note that this is incorrectly defined in @file{xm-@var{system}.h} files
4741 currently.]
4742
4743 @item FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4744 @findex FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS
4745 Define this if the native-dependent code will provide its own routines
4746 @code{fetch_inferior_registers} and @code{store_inferior_registers} in
4747 @file{@var{host}-nat.c}. If this symbol is @emph{not} defined, and
4748 @file{infptrace.c} is included in this configuration, the default
4749 routines in @file{infptrace.c} are used for these functions.
4750
4751 @item FP0_REGNUM
4752 @findex FP0_REGNUM
4753 This macro is normally defined to be the number of the first floating
4754 point register, if the machine has such registers. As such, it would
4755 appear only in target-specific code. However, @file{/proc} support uses this
4756 to decide whether floats are in use on this target.
4757
4758 @item GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
4759 @findex GET_LONGJMP_TARGET
4760 For most machines, this is a target-dependent parameter. On the
4761 DECstation and the Iris, this is a native-dependent parameter, since
4762 @file{setjmp.h} is needed to define it.
4763
4764 This macro determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp} will jump to,
4765 assuming that we have just stopped at a longjmp breakpoint. It takes a
4766 @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the target PC value through this
4767 pointer. It examines the current state of the machine as needed.
4768
4769 @item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4770 An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4771 support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4772
4773 @item KERNEL_U_ADDR
4774 @findex KERNEL_U_ADDR
4775 Define this to the address of the @code{u} structure (the ``user
4776 struct'', also known as the ``u-page'') in kernel virtual memory. @value{GDBN}
4777 needs to know this so that it can subtract this address from absolute
4778 addresses in the upage, that are obtained via ptrace or from core files.
4779 On systems that don't need this value, set it to zero.
4780
4781 @item KERNEL_U_ADDR_HPUX
4782 @findex KERNEL_U_ADDR_HPUX
4783 Define this to cause @value{GDBN} to determine the address of @code{u} at
4784 runtime, by using HP-style @code{nlist} on the kernel's image in the
4785 root directory.
4786
4787 @item ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4788 @findex ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT
4789 Define this to be able to, when a breakpoint insertion fails, warn the
4790 user that another process may be running with the same executable.
4791
4792 @item PROC_NAME_FMT
4793 @findex PROC_NAME_FMT
4794 Defines the format for the name of a @file{/proc} device. Should be
4795 defined in @file{nm.h} @emph{only} in order to override the default
4796 definition in @file{procfs.c}.
4797
4798 @item PTRACE_ARG3_TYPE
4799 @findex PTRACE_ARG3_TYPE
4800 The type of the third argument to the @code{ptrace} system call, if it
4801 exists and is different from @code{int}.
4802
4803 @item REGISTER_U_ADDR
4804 @findex REGISTER_U_ADDR
4805 Defines the offset of the registers in the ``u area''.
4806
4807 @item SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4808 @findex SHELL_COMMAND_CONCAT
4809 If defined, is a string to prefix on the shell command used to start the
4810 inferior.
4811
4812 @item SHELL_FILE
4813 @findex SHELL_FILE
4814 If defined, this is the name of the shell to use to run the inferior.
4815 Defaults to @code{"/bin/sh"}.
4816
4817 @item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
4818 @findex SOLIB_ADD
4819 Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
4820 @var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table. If
4821 @var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
4822 processing for @var{filename} is still done.
4823
4824 @item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4825 @findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
4826 Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
4827 want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
4828
4829 @item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4830 @findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
4831 When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
4832 twice; once when
4833 the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs. If the actual
4834 number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
4835 expand into the number expected.
4836
4837 @item USE_PROC_FS
4838 @findex USE_PROC_FS
4839 This determines whether small routines in @file{*-tdep.c}, which
4840 translate register values between @value{GDBN}'s internal
4841 representation and the @file{/proc} representation, are compiled.
4842
4843 @item U_REGS_OFFSET
4844 @findex U_REGS_OFFSET
4845 This is the offset of the registers in the upage. It need only be
4846 defined if the generic ptrace register access routines in
4847 @file{infptrace.c} are being used (that is, @file{infptrace.c} is
4848 configured in, and @code{FETCH_INFERIOR_REGISTERS} is not defined). If
4849 the default value from @file{infptrace.c} is good enough, leave it
4850 undefined.
4851
4852 The default value means that u.u_ar0 @emph{points to} the location of
4853 the registers. I'm guessing that @code{#define U_REGS_OFFSET 0} means
4854 that @code{u.u_ar0} @emph{is} the location of the registers.
4855
4856 @item CLEAR_SOLIB
4857 @findex CLEAR_SOLIB
4858 See @file{objfiles.c}.
4859
4860 @item DEBUG_PTRACE
4861 @findex DEBUG_PTRACE
4862 Define this to debug @code{ptrace} calls.
4863 @end table
4864
4865
4866 @node Support Libraries
4867
4868 @chapter Support Libraries
4869
4870 @section BFD
4871 @cindex BFD library
4872
4873 BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
4874
4875 @table @emph
4876 @item identifying executable and core files
4877 BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
4878 several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
4879
4880 @item access to sections of files
4881 BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
4882 sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
4883 (such as the text section or the data section). @value{GDBN} simply
4884 calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
4885 length @var{z}.
4886
4887 @item specialized core file support
4888 BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
4889 core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
4890 file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
4891 file.
4892
4893 @item locating the symbol information
4894 @value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
4895 symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file. @value{GDBN} itself
4896 handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
4897 symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
4898 string table, etc.
4899 @end table
4900
4901 @section opcodes
4902 @cindex opcodes library
4903
4904 The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler. (It's a separate
4905 library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
4906
4907 @section readline
4908 @cindex readline library
4909 The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
4910 that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
4911
4912 @section libiberty
4913 @cindex @code{libiberty} library
4914
4915 The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
4916 that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
4917 systems. Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
4918 groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
4919 environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
4920 a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
4921 functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
4922 beyond standard functions).
4923
4924 @value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
4925 library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
4926 floating format support functions, the input options parser
4927 @samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
4928
4929 @subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
4930 @cindex @code{obstacks}
4931
4932 The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
4933 chunks of memory. Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
4934 like a stack. Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
4935 allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
4936 @code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
4937 @code{obstacks}).
4938
4939 The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
4940 object files. There is an obstack associated with each internal
4941 representation of an object file. Lots of things get allocated on
4942 these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
4943 symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
4944 fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
4945 offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
4946 string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
4947 information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
4948 unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data. Plus
4949 various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
4950 names of types.
4951
4952 An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
4953 that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
4954 various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
4955 once using the @code{obstack_free} function. The @code{obstack_free}
4956 function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
4957 deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
4958 start the cleanups). Because of the stack like structure of the
4959 @code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
4960 obstack. There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
4961 happens. Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
4962 is allocated to the obstack. Only the local data is deleted from the
4963 obstack. Of course this assumes that nothing between the
4964 @code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
4965 else on the same obstack. For this reason it is best and safest to
4966 use temporary @code{obstacks}.
4967
4968 Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se. It is safe only
4969 under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
4970 longer needed. In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
4971 when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
4972 new symbol file.
4973
4974 @section gnu-regex
4975 @cindex regular expressions library
4976
4977 Regex conditionals.
4978
4979 @table @code
4980 @item C_ALLOCA
4981
4982 @item NFAILURES
4983
4984 @item RE_NREGS
4985
4986 @item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
4987
4988 @item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
4989
4990 @item SYNTAX_TABLE
4991
4992 @item Sword
4993
4994 @item sparc
4995 @end table
4996
4997 @section Array Containers
4998 @cindex Array Containers
4999 @cindex VEC
5000
5001 Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
5002 objects. C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
5003 and repetitive. The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
5004 and using a typesafe vector type. The functions defined will be
5005 inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
5006 Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
5007
5008 An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
5009 The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
5010 the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
5011 bookkeeping. Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
5012 accidentally mixing up the contents. Think of these as C++ templates,
5013 but implemented in C.
5014
5015 Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
5016 and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
5017 these variants. Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
5018 pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
5019 stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
5020 dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector. The scalar
5021 object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
5022 elements are returned by value.
5023
5024 There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors. The iterator
5025 returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
5026 variable passed by reference. Because the iterator will be inlined,
5027 the address-of can be optimized away.
5028
5029 The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
5030 are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
5031 itself. This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
5032 --- always use a pointer to a vector. The one exception is the final
5033 field of a structure, which could be a vector type. You will have to
5034 use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
5035 such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
5036 the @dfn{safe} allocation variants). The trailing array idiom is used
5037 (rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
5038 @code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
5039 minimal space in the structure containing them.
5040
5041 Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
5042 available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants. The former presumes
5043 that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
5044 (it dies if there is not). The latter will reallocate the vector, if
5045 needed. Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
5046 If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
5047 to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
5048 @dfn{quick} operation. This will ensure there are at least as many
5049 elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
5050 too few spare slots. If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
5051 but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
5052 is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation. You
5053 can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
5054
5055 You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
5056 remove from the end of the vector. If you need to remove several items
5057 in one go, use the truncate operation. The insert and remove
5058 operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
5059 There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
5060 ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
5061 @code{unordered_remove}. The latter function copies the end element
5062 into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation. The
5063 @code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
5064 the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
5065
5066 If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
5067 accessor will return the address of the start of the vector. Also the
5068 @code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
5069 vector. You will not normally need to use these two functions.
5070
5071 Vector types are defined using a
5072 @code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro. Variables of vector
5073 type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro. The
5074 characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
5075 @var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
5076 (@code{I}) type. Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
5077 awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one. There is a
5078 check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
5079 @code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
5080 that is not possible in plain C.
5081
5082 An example of their use would be,
5083
5084 @smallexample
5085 DEF_VEC_P(tree); // non-managed tree vector.
5086
5087 struct my_struct @{
5088 VEC(tree) *v; // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
5089 @};
5090
5091 struct my_struct *s;
5092
5093 if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
5094 VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
5095 for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
5096 @{ do something with elt @}
5097
5098 @end smallexample
5099
5100 The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
5101 accessors provided. They are enumerated here:
5102
5103 @table @code
5104 @item VEC_length
5105 Return the number of items in the array,
5106
5107 @item VEC_empty
5108 Return true if the array has no elements.
5109
5110 @item VEC_last
5111 @itemx VEC_index
5112 Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
5113
5114 @item VEC_iterate
5115 Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
5116 traversed.
5117
5118 @item VEC_alloc
5119 @itemx VEC_free
5120 Create and destroy an array.
5121
5122 @item VEC_embedded_size
5123 @itemx VEC_embedded_init
5124 Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
5125
5126 @item VEC_copy
5127 Duplicate an array.
5128
5129 @item VEC_space
5130 Return the amount of free space in an array.
5131
5132 @item VEC_reserve
5133 Ensure a certain amount of free space.
5134
5135 @item VEC_quick_push
5136 @itemx VEC_safe_push
5137 Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
5138 sure that it is.
5139
5140 @item VEC_pop
5141 Remove the last item from an array.
5142
5143 @item VEC_truncate
5144 Remove several items from the end of an array.
5145
5146 @item VEC_safe_grow
5147 Add several items to the end of an array.
5148
5149 @item VEC_replace
5150 Overwrite an item in the array.
5151
5152 @item VEC_quick_insert
5153 @itemx VEC_safe_insert
5154 Insert an item into the middle of the array. Either the space must
5155 already exist, or the space is created.
5156
5157 @item VEC_ordered_remove
5158 @itemx VEC_unordered_remove
5159 Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
5160
5161 @item VEC_block_remove
5162 Remove a set of items from the array.
5163
5164 @item VEC_address
5165 Provide the address of the first element.
5166
5167 @item VEC_lower_bound
5168 Binary search the array.
5169
5170 @end table
5171
5172 @section include
5173
5174 @node Coding
5175
5176 @chapter Coding
5177
5178 This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
5179 algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
5180
5181 @section Cleanups
5182 @cindex cleanups
5183
5184 Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
5185 later.
5186
5187 When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
5188 @code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
5189 the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup. The
5190 cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
5191 and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
5192 is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
5193 cleanups. Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
5194 created.
5195
5196 Syntax:
5197
5198 @table @code
5199 @item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5200 Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5201
5202 @findex make_cleanup
5203 @item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5204 Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5205 @var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later. The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5206 handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5207 @code{discard_cleanups}. Unless you are going to call
5208 @code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5209 from @code{make_cleanup}.
5210
5211 @findex do_cleanups
5212 @item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5213 Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5214 @code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5215
5216 @findex discard_cleanups
5217 @item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5218 Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5219 the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5220 @end table
5221
5222 Cleanups are implemented as a chain. The handle returned by
5223 @code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5224 later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5225 performed). E.g.:
5226
5227 @smallexample
5228 make_cleanup (a, 0);
5229 @{
5230 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5231 make_cleanup (c, 0)
5232 ...
5233 do_cleanups (old);
5234 @}
5235 @end smallexample
5236
5237 @noindent
5238 will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}. The
5239 cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5240 be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5241
5242 Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5243 Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5244 will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups. This need leads
5245 to two common cleanup styles.
5246
5247 The first style is try/finally. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5248 @code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5249 code-block's cleanups are always performed. For instance, the following
5250 code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5251 called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5252 @code{xfree} will always be called:
5253
5254 @smallexample
5255 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5256 data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5257 make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5258 ... blah blah ...
5259 do_cleanups (old);
5260 @end smallexample
5261
5262 The second style is try/except. Before it exits, your code-block calls
5263 @code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5264 any created cleanups are not performed. For instance, the following
5265 code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5266 an error:
5267
5268 @smallexample
5269 FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5270 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5271 ... blah blah ...
5272 discard_cleanups (old);
5273 return file;
5274 @end smallexample
5275
5276 Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5277 that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''. This
5278 means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5279 interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5280 functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5281 @samp{longjmp} instead).
5282
5283 @section Per-architecture module data
5284 @cindex per-architecture module data
5285 @cindex multi-arch data
5286 @cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5287
5288 The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5289 specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5290 architecture object.
5291
5292 A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5293
5294 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5295 @var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5296 per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5297 in as a parameter). Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5298 architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5299 and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5300 @end deftypefun
5301
5302 @deftypefun struct gdbarch_data *gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5303 @var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5304 per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}. Since @var{post_init} is
5305 always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5306 initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5307 per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5308 other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5309 create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5310 @end deftypefun
5311
5312 These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5313 identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5314
5315 The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5316
5317 @deftypefun void *gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5318 Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5319 @var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5320 or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5321 current value of the per-architecture data-pointer. If the data
5322 pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5323 corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5324 @end deftypefun
5325
5326 The examples below assume the following definitions:
5327
5328 @smallexample
5329 struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5330 static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5331 @end smallexample
5332
5333 A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5334 per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method. The module's
5335 per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5336 creation.
5337
5338 In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added. An
5339 architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5340 from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5341
5342 @smallexample
5343 static void *
5344 nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
5345 @{
5346 struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
5347 return data;
5348 @}
5349 @end smallexample
5350
5351 @smallexample
5352 extern void
5353 set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
5354 @{
5355 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5356 data->total = nozel;
5357 @}
5358 @end smallexample
5359
5360 A module can on-demand create architecture dependant data structures
5361 using @code{post_init}.
5362
5363 In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
5364 @code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
5365 architecture.
5366
5367 @smallexample
5368 static void *
5369 nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5370 @{
5371 struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
5372 nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
5373 return data;
5374 @}
5375 @end smallexample
5376
5377 @smallexample
5378 extern int
5379 nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5380 @{
5381 struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5382 return data->total;
5383 @}
5384 @end smallexample
5385
5386 @section Wrapping Output Lines
5387 @cindex line wrap in output
5388
5389 @findex wrap_here
5390 Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
5391 or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
5392 added in places that would be good breaking points. The utility
5393 routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
5394 exceeded.
5395
5396 The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
5397 printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there. This argument is saved
5398 away and used later. It must remain valid until the next call to
5399 @code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
5400 @code{*_filtered} functions. Don't pass in a local variable and then
5401 return!
5402
5403 It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
5404 space. If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
5405 indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
5406 the line wraps there.
5407
5408 Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
5409 finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
5410 to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output. Symbol reading routines that
5411 print warnings are a good example.
5412
5413 @section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
5414 @cindex coding standards
5415
5416 @value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
5417 @file{etc/standards.texi}. This file is also available for anonymous
5418 FTP from GNU archive sites. @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
5419 of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
5420 but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
5421
5422 @value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
5423 @value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
5424
5425
5426 @subsection ISO C
5427
5428 @value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
5429 compiler.
5430
5431 @value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
5432
5433
5434 @subsection Memory Management
5435
5436 @value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
5437 @code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
5438
5439 @value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
5440 @code{xcalloc} when allocating memory. Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
5441 these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty. Instead,
5442 they unwind the stack using cleanups. These functions return
5443 @code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
5444
5445 @emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
5446 memory allocation is removed. These functions provide portable
5447 behavior.}
5448
5449 @value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
5450
5451 @value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
5452 memory pool. Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
5453 free a @code{NULL} pointer.
5454
5455 @emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
5456 @code{NULL} pointer.}
5457
5458 @value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
5459 allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
5460
5461 @emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable. Some systems
5462 restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
5463
5464 @value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
5465 function @code{xstrprintf}.
5466
5467 @emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail. Print
5468 functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
5469 errors.}
5470
5471
5472 @subsection Compiler Warnings
5473 @cindex compiler warnings
5474
5475 With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
5476 @samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}. The exceptions
5477 are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}. The default, when
5478 building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
5479
5480 This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
5481 with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags. Any warnings
5482 from those flags are treated as errors.
5483
5484 The current list of warning flags includes:
5485
5486 @table @samp
5487 @item -Wall
5488 Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
5489
5490 @item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
5491
5492 @sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
5493 code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
5494
5495 @item -Wpointer-arith
5496
5497 @item -Wformat-nonliteral
5498 Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
5499 might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
5500 Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
5501 @code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
5502 but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
5503
5504 @item -Wno-pointer-sign
5505 In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
5506 assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
5507 signedness. However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
5508 carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}. In early 2006
5509 the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
5510 worth the time it would take.
5511
5512 @item -Wno-unused-parameter
5513 Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
5514 unused parameters. Consequently this warning is avoided. The macro
5515 @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
5516 it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
5517 is being used.
5518
5519 @item -Wno-unused
5520 @itemx -Wno-switch
5521 These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
5522 currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
5523
5524 @end table
5525
5526 @subsection Formatting
5527
5528 @cindex source code formatting
5529 The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
5530 strictly.
5531
5532 A function declaration should not have its name in column zero. A
5533 function definition should have its name in column zero.
5534
5535 @smallexample
5536 /* Declaration */
5537 static void foo (void);
5538 /* Definition */
5539 void
5540 foo (void)
5541 @{
5542 @}
5543 @end smallexample
5544
5545 @emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting. Function definitions can
5546 be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
5547
5548 There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
5549 parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
5550 required by C). There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
5551 or before a close paren/bracket.
5552
5553 While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
5554 more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
5555 after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
5556 whitespace after the semicolon). Excess whitespace causes difficulties
5557 for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
5558
5559 Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
5560
5561 @smallexample
5562 void *foo;
5563 @end smallexample
5564
5565 @noindent
5566 and not:
5567
5568 @smallexample
5569 void * foo;
5570 void* foo;
5571 @end smallexample
5572
5573 @subsection Comments
5574
5575 @cindex comment formatting
5576 The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
5577
5578 Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
5579 @code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
5580
5581 @smallexample
5582 /* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger. If inferior
5583 gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
5584 returning. That is why there is a loop in this function. When
5585 this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
5586 stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands. */
5587 @end smallexample
5588
5589 (Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
5590 comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
5591
5592 Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
5593 variable definitions, and the definition itself.
5594
5595 In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
5596 than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
5597 line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
5598 than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
5599
5600 @subsection C Usage
5601
5602 @cindex C data types
5603 Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
5604 host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
5605 of evaluation of expressions.
5606
5607 @cindex function usage
5608 Use functions freely. There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
5609 in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
5610 call, mainly in symbol reading. Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
5611 limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
5612
5613 However, use functions with moderation. A thousand one-line functions
5614 are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
5615
5616 @emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
5617 (But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
5618 protected with parentheses.)
5619
5620 @cindex types
5621
5622 Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
5623 declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
5624
5625
5626 @subsection Function Prototypes
5627 @cindex function prototypes
5628
5629 Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
5630 a function. Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
5631 argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
5632 function definition.
5633
5634 All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
5635 callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
5636 be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
5637 visible to random source files.
5638
5639 Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
5640 that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
5641
5642
5643 @subsection Internal Error Recovery
5644
5645 During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
5646 User errors and internal errors. User errors include not only a user
5647 entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
5648 object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
5649 Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
5650 run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
5651
5652 When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
5653 @code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
5654
5655 @value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
5656
5657 @emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function. Either
5658 the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
5659 @code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
5660 error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
5661
5662 @subsection File Names
5663
5664 Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
5665 case. Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
5666 unique. These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
5667
5668 @emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
5669 platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS. Every time an unfriendly file
5670 is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
5671 @file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly. Compare the
5672 convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
5673 @file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
5674 @file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
5675
5676 Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
5677 of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
5678
5679 @emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
5680
5681 When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
5682 @file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
5683 @file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}). These headers should be relatively
5684 independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
5685 the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
5686 should refer only to system types. They may be shared between multiple
5687 programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
5688
5689 For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
5690
5691
5692 @subsection Include Files
5693
5694 A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
5695
5696 A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5697 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5698 indirect inclusion.
5699
5700 A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
5701 declaration and/or definition it directly refers to. It cannot rely on
5702 indirect inclusion. Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
5703 be directly included.
5704
5705 An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
5706
5707 An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
5708 Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
5709 pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
5710
5711 A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
5712
5713 An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
5714 files. Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
5715 @code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
5716
5717 All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
5718
5719 @smallexample
5720 #ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5721 #define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
5722 header body
5723 #endif
5724 @end smallexample
5725
5726
5727 @subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
5728
5729 @cindex design
5730 In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
5731 semantics. Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
5732 experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
5733 trouble.
5734
5735 @cindex assumptions about targets
5736 You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
5737 (including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions). Such things
5738 must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
5739 @value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
5740 such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
5741
5742 You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
5743 the target system. All references to the target must go through the
5744 current @code{target_ops} vector.
5745
5746 You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
5747 (except in the ``native'' support modules). In particular, you can't
5748 assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
5749 host machine. Target code must bring along its own header files --
5750 written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
5751 copyright problems.
5752
5753 @cindex portability
5754 Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon. It's much better
5755 to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
5756 systems.
5757
5758 @cindex system dependencies
5759 New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
5760 or operating systems are unacceptable. All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
5761 for features. The information about which configurations contain which
5762 features should be segregated into the configuration files. Experience
5763 has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
5764 often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
5765 predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
5766 time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
5767 with regard to this feature.
5768
5769 Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
5770 target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
5771
5772 @cindex portable file name handling
5773 @cindex file names, portability
5774 One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
5775 creep in is handling of file names. The mainline @value{GDBN} code
5776 assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
5777 a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
5778 directories, case-sensitive file names. These assumptions are not
5779 necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows. To avoid
5780 system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
5781 name, use the following portable macros:
5782
5783 @table @code
5784 @findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5785 @item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
5786 This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
5787 whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family. Use this
5788 symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
5789 such hosts.
5790
5791 @findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
5792 @item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
5793 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
5794 character. On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
5795 such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
5796 pass.
5797
5798 @findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
5799 @item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
5800 Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
5801 For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
5802 @file{/} is absolute. On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
5803 @file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
5804
5805 @findex FILENAME_CMP
5806 @item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
5807 Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
5808 appropriate for the underlying host filesystem. For Posix systems,
5809 this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
5810 will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
5811
5812 @findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5813 @item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
5814 Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
5815 @code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
5816 This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
5817
5818 @findex SLASH_STRING
5819 @item SLASH_STRING
5820 This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
5821 absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
5822 @code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
5823 @code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
5824 @end table
5825
5826 In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
5827 functions whenever possible. For example, to extract a directory or a
5828 basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
5829 @code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
5830 platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
5831 with @code{strrchr}.
5832
5833 Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
5834 attribute struct. For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
5835 multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
5836 by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
5837 well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references). Whenever
5838 something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
5839 using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
5840 @code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
5841 current target_ops structure. In this way, when a new remote interface
5842 is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
5843 implements the new remote interface. Other examples of
5844 attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
5845 formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
5846
5847 Please avoid duplicating code. For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
5848 the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
5849 @value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
5850 something was very painful. In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
5851 consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}. @file{infptrace.c} can deal
5852 with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
5853 file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
5854 radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
5855
5856 All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
5857 @var{module}} command. Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
5858 messages. Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}. Do not use
5859 @code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
5860
5861
5862 @node Porting GDB
5863
5864 @chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
5865 @cindex porting to new machines
5866
5867 Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
5868 specifying the configuration of the machine. This is done in a
5869 dizzying variety of header files and configuration scripts, which we
5870 hope to make more sensible soon. Let's say your new host is called an
5871 @var{xyz} (e.g., @samp{sun4}), and its full three-part configuration
5872 name is @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}} (e.g.,
5873 @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}). In particular:
5874
5875 @itemize @bullet
5876 @item
5877 In the top level directory, edit @file{config.sub} and add @var{arch},
5878 @var{xvend}, and @var{xos} to the lists of supported architectures,
5879 vendors, and operating systems near the bottom of the file. Also, add
5880 @var{xyz} as an alias that maps to
5881 @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}. You can test your changes by
5882 running
5883
5884 @smallexample
5885 ./config.sub @var{xyz}
5886 @end smallexample
5887
5888 @noindent
5889 and
5890
5891 @smallexample
5892 ./config.sub @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5893 @end smallexample
5894
5895 @noindent
5896 which should both respond with @code{@var{arch}-@var{xvend}-@var{xos}}
5897 and no error messages.
5898
5899 @noindent
5900 You need to port BFD, if that hasn't been done already. Porting BFD is
5901 beyond the scope of this manual.
5902
5903 @item
5904 To configure @value{GDBN} itself, edit @file{gdb/configure.host} to recognize
5905 your system and set @code{gdb_host} to @var{xyz}, and (unless your
5906 desired target is already available) also edit @file{gdb/configure.tgt},
5907 setting @code{gdb_target} to something appropriate (for instance,
5908 @var{xyz}).
5909
5910 @emph{Maintainer's note: Work in progress. The file
5911 @file{gdb/configure.host} originally needed to be modified when either a
5912 new native target or a new host machine was being added to @value{GDBN}.
5913 Recent changes have removed this requirement. The file now only needs
5914 to be modified when adding a new native configuration. This will likely
5915 changed again in the future.}
5916
5917 @item
5918 Finally, you'll need to specify and define @value{GDBN}'s host-, native-, and
5919 target-dependent @file{.h} and @file{.c} files used for your
5920 configuration.
5921 @end itemize
5922
5923 @node Versions and Branches
5924 @chapter Versions and Branches
5925
5926 @section Versions
5927
5928 @value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
5929 @file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
5930
5931 @table @asis
5932 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}
5933 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
5934 an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
5935 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5936 a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
5937 6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
5938 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
5939 a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
5940 6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
5941 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
5942 a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
5943 @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
5944 may include additional changes
5945 @end table
5946
5947 @value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
5948 numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
5949 of 50. At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
5950 @var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
5951
5952 @value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar. When the branch is cut, the
5953 @var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90. As draft releases are
5954 drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented. Once the
5955 first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
5956 @var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
5957 @var{patchlevel}.
5958
5959 For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
5960 identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
5961
5962 @table @asis
5963 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5964 drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
5965 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5966 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5967 drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
5968 6.1.90.20020304)
5969 @item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
5970 @itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
5971 drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
5972 @end table
5973
5974 If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
5975 6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
5976 here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
5977
5978 @smallexample
5979 <HEAD>
5980 |
5981 6.1.50.20020302-cvs
5982 |
5983 +--------------------------.
5984 | <gdb_6_2-branch>
5985 | |
5986 6.2.50.20020303-cvs 6.1.90 (draft #1)
5987 | |
5988 6.2.50.20020304-cvs 6.1.90.20020304-cvs
5989 | |
5990 6.2.50.20020305-cvs 6.1.91 (draft #2)
5991 | |
5992 6.2.50.20020306-cvs 6.1.91.20020306-cvs
5993 | |
5994 6.2.50.20020307-cvs 6.2 (release)
5995 | |
5996 6.2.50.20020308-cvs 6.2.0.20020308-cvs
5997 | |
5998 6.2.50.20020309-cvs 6.2.1 (update)
5999 | |
6000 6.2.50.20020310-cvs <branch closed>
6001 |
6002 6.2.50.20020311-cvs
6003 |
6004 +--------------------------.
6005 | <gdb_6_3-branch>
6006 | |
6007 6.3.50.20020312-cvs 6.2.90 (draft #1)
6008 | |
6009 @end smallexample
6010
6011 @section Release Branches
6012 @cindex Release Branches
6013
6014 @value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
6015 single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
6016 branch tags:
6017
6018 @smallexample
6019 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
6020 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
6021 gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
6022 @end smallexample
6023
6024 @emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
6025 release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
6026 date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag. The
6027 branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
6028
6029 @section Vendor Branches
6030 @cindex vendor branches
6031
6032 To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
6033 @file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
6034 (an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
6035 its version identifier). E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
6036 Inc Patch 2)}.
6037
6038 @section Experimental Branches
6039 @cindex experimental branches
6040
6041 @subsection Guidelines
6042
6043 @value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
6044 repository, for experimental development. Branches make it possible
6045 for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
6046 significant new developments.
6047
6048 The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
6049
6050 @table @emph
6051
6052 @item a branch has an owner
6053 The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
6054 ground rules. In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
6055 adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
6056
6057 @item all commits are posted
6058 All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
6059 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} patches
6060 mailing list}. While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
6061 should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
6062
6063 @item all commits are covered by an assignment
6064 This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
6065 and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
6066
6067 @item a branch is focused
6068 A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
6069 unnecessary or irrelevant changes. Cleanups, where identified, being
6070 be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
6071
6072 @item a branch tracks mainline
6073 This keeps the level of divergence under control. It also keeps the
6074 pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
6075 mainline.
6076
6077 @item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
6078 The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
6079 branch (branches of individual files should be avoided). @xref{Tags}.
6080
6081 @item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
6082 The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
6083 the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
6084 @samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
6085
6086 @end table
6087
6088 @subsection Tags
6089 @anchor{Tags}
6090
6091 To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
6092 branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
6093
6094 @table @code
6095
6096 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6097 @itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
6098 The branch point and corresponding branch tag. @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
6099 date that the branch was created. A branch is created using the
6100 sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
6101 @smallexample
6102 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
6103 cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
6104 @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
6105 @end smallexample
6106
6107 @item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6108 The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
6109 on @var{yyyymmdd}. To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
6110 use a command sequence like:
6111 @smallexample
6112 cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
6113 cvs update \
6114 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6115 -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6116 @end smallexample
6117 @noindent
6118 Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
6119 merge.
6120
6121 @end table
6122
6123 @noindent
6124 For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
6125 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
6126
6127 @node Start of New Year Procedure
6128 @chapter Start of New Year Procedure
6129 @cindex new year procedure
6130
6131 At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
6132
6133 @itemize @bullet
6134 @item
6135 Rotate the ChangeLog file
6136
6137 The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
6138 @file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
6139 A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
6140 contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog. The following should
6141 also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
6142 the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
6143 @smallexample
6144 Local Variables:
6145 mode: change-log
6146 left-margin: 8
6147 fill-column: 74
6148 version-control: never
6149 End:
6150 @end smallexample
6151
6152 @item
6153 Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
6154 in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6155
6156 @item
6157 Update the copyright year in the startup message
6158
6159 Update the copyright year in file @file{top.c}, function
6160 @code{print_gdb_version}.
6161 @end itemize
6162
6163 @node Releasing GDB
6164
6165 @chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
6166 @cindex making a new release of gdb
6167
6168 @section Branch Commit Policy
6169
6170 The branch commit policy is pretty slack. @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
6171 5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
6172
6173 @itemize @bullet
6174 @item
6175 The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
6176 @item
6177 Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
6178 trunk. If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
6179 file is better than committing a hack.
6180 @item
6181 When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6182 Does it fix a build? Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6183 when debugging a static binary?
6184 @item
6185 The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6186 the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6187 @item
6188 Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6189 sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6190 @file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6191 @end itemize
6192
6193 @emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6194 functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6195 This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6196 reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6197
6198
6199 @section Obsoleting code
6200
6201 Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6202 code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6203 (an old target, an unused file).
6204
6205 Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6206 line. Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6207 been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6208
6209 The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6210 wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6211 Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6212
6213 @enumerate
6214 @item
6215 Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB mailing
6216 list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6217 recommended.
6218 @item
6219 Wait a week or so.
6220 @item
6221 Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, the GDB
6222 Announcement mailing list}.
6223 @item
6224 Wait a week or so.
6225 @item
6226 Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6227 prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6228 @item
6229 Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6230 released.
6231 @item
6232 Remove the obsolete code.
6233 @end enumerate
6234
6235 @noindent
6236 @emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6237 hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development. Firstly it
6238 helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6239 or simply wrong. Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6240 the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6241 hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6242
6243
6244
6245 @section Before the Branch
6246
6247 The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6248 changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created. For
6249 instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6250 building. If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6251 @file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6252
6253 @subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6254
6255 People always forget. Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6256 something interesting happened add it yourself. The @code{schedule}
6257 script will mention this in its e-mail.
6258
6259 @subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6260
6261 Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6262 @file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved. The
6263 @code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6264
6265 @subheading Refresh any imported files.
6266
6267 A number of files are taken from external repositories. They include:
6268
6269 @itemize @bullet
6270 @item
6271 @file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6272 @item
6273 @file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6274 file)
6275 @item
6276 @file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6277 @end itemize
6278
6279 @subheading Check the ARI
6280
6281 @uref{http://sources.redhat.com/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6282 (Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6283 conventions. The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6284 of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems. There shouldn't be any
6285 regressions.
6286
6287 @subsection Review the bug data base
6288
6289 Close anything obviously fixed.
6290
6291 @subsection Check all cross targets build
6292
6293 The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6294
6295
6296 @section Cut the Branch
6297
6298 @subheading Create the branch
6299
6300 @smallexample
6301 $ u=5.1
6302 $ v=5.2
6303 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6304 $ D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6305 $ echo $u $V $D
6306 5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6307 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6308 -D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6309 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag
6310 -D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6311 $ ^echo ^^
6312 ...
6313 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6314 -b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6315 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src rtag \
6316 -b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6317 $ ^echo ^^
6318 ...
6319 $
6320 @end smallexample
6321
6322 @itemize @bullet
6323 @item
6324 By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6325 date/time.
6326 @item
6327 The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6328 @item
6329 Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6330 @item
6331 @file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6332 @item
6333 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6334 @end itemize
6335
6336 @subheading Update @file{version.in}
6337
6338 @smallexample
6339 $ u=5.1
6340 $ v=5.2
6341 $ V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6342 $ echo $u $v$V
6343 5.1 5_2
6344 $ cd /tmp
6345 $ echo cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co \
6346 -r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
6347 cvs -f -d :ext:sources.redhat.com:/cvs/src co
6348 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
6349 $ ^echo ^^
6350 U src/gdb/version.in
6351 $ cd src/gdb
6352 $ echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
6353 $ cat version.in
6354 5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
6355 $ cvs -f commit version.in
6356 @end smallexample
6357
6358 @itemize @bullet
6359 @item
6360 @file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
6361 mechanism.
6362 @item
6363 @file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
6364 initial branch version number.
6365 @end itemize
6366
6367
6368 @subheading Update the web and news pages
6369
6370 Something?
6371
6372 @subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
6373
6374 The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
6375 This file needs to be updated so that:
6376
6377 @itemize @bullet
6378 @item
6379 A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
6380 @item
6381 The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
6382 @end itemize
6383
6384 @noindent
6385 See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
6386 cron table.
6387
6388 The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
6389 any changes. That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
6390 snapshot directories.
6391
6392
6393 @subheading Update the NEWS and README files
6394
6395 The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
6396 to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
6397 refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
6398
6399 The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
6400 current release.
6401
6402 @subheading Post the branch info
6403
6404 Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
6405
6406 @itemize @bullet
6407 @item
6408 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6409 @item
6410 @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
6411 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Testers mailing list}
6412 @end itemize
6413
6414 @emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
6415 ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
6416 list are alerted.}
6417
6418 The announcement should include:
6419
6420 @itemize @bullet
6421 @item
6422 The branch tag.
6423 @item
6424 How to check out the branch using CVS.
6425 @item
6426 The date/number of weeks until the release.
6427 @item
6428 The branch commit policy still holds.
6429 @end itemize
6430
6431 @section Stabilize the branch
6432
6433 Something goes here.
6434
6435 @section Create a Release
6436
6437 The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
6438 down into a number of stages. The first part addresses the technical
6439 process of creating a releasable tar ball. The later stages address the
6440 process of releasing that tar ball.
6441
6442 When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
6443
6444 @subsection Create a release candidate
6445
6446 The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
6447 made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
6448 candidate).
6449
6450 @subsubheading Freeze the branch
6451
6452 Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
6453 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com}.
6454
6455 @subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
6456
6457 @smallexample
6458 $ b=gdb_5_2-branch
6459 $ v=5.2
6460 $ t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
6461 $ echo $t/$b/$v
6462 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6463 $ mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
6464 $ cd $t/$b/$v
6465 $ pwd
6466 /sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
6467 $ which autoconf
6468 /home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
6469 $
6470 @end smallexample
6471
6472 @noindent
6473 Notes:
6474
6475 @itemize @bullet
6476 @item
6477 Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully. You want to be using the
6478 version taken from the @file{binutils} snapshot directory, which can be
6479 found at @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/binutils/}. It is very
6480 unlikely that a system installed version of @code{autoconf} (e.g.,
6481 @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
6482 @end itemize
6483
6484 @subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
6485
6486 @smallexample
6487 $ for m in gdb insight
6488 do
6489 ( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
6490 done
6491 $
6492 @end smallexample
6493
6494 @noindent
6495 Note:
6496
6497 @itemize @bullet
6498 @item
6499 The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
6500 any confusion between what is written here and what your local
6501 @code{cvs} really does.
6502 @end itemize
6503
6504 @subsubheading Update relevant files.
6505
6506 @table @file
6507
6508 @item gdb/NEWS
6509
6510 Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline. Minor
6511 releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
6512
6513 Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
6514
6515 @smallexample
6516 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
6517 ...
6518 c-x 4 a
6519 ...
6520 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6521 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
6522 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6523 @end smallexample
6524
6525 @item gdb/README
6526
6527 You'll need to update:
6528
6529 @itemize @bullet
6530 @item
6531 The version.
6532 @item
6533 The update date.
6534 @item
6535 Who did it.
6536 @end itemize
6537
6538 @smallexample
6539 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
6540 ...
6541 c-x 4 a
6542 ...
6543 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6544 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
6545 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6546 @end smallexample
6547
6548 @emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
6549 before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
6550 to get it updated.}
6551
6552 @emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
6553 @file{INSTALL} from the core documentation. This might be worth
6554 pursuing.}
6555
6556 @item gdb/version.in
6557
6558 @smallexample
6559 $ echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6560 $ cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6561 5.2
6562 $ emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
6563 ...
6564 c-x 4 a
6565 ... Bump to version ...
6566 c-x c-s c-x c-c
6567 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
6568 $ cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
6569 @end smallexample
6570
6571 @end table
6572
6573 @subsubheading Do the dirty work
6574
6575 This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
6576
6577 @smallexample
6578 $ for m in gdb insight
6579 do
6580 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
6581 done
6582 @end smallexample
6583
6584 If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
6585 (@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
6586
6587 @smallexample
6588 $ for m in gdb insight
6589 do
6590 ( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
6591 done
6592 @end smallexample
6593
6594 @subsubheading Check the source files
6595
6596 You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
6597 @kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't. Watch out
6598 for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
6599
6600 @smallexample
6601 $ ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
6602 M djunpack.bat
6603 ? gdb-5.1.91.tar
6604 ? proto-toplev
6605 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6606 M gdb/ChangeLog
6607 M gdb/NEWS
6608 M gdb/README
6609 M gdb/version.in
6610 @dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
6611 $
6612 @end smallexample
6613
6614 @noindent
6615 @emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
6616 @file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}. They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
6617 was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
6618 didn't get suppressed). Fixing it would be nice though.}
6619
6620 @subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
6621
6622 @smallexample
6623 $ cp */src/*.tar .
6624 $ cp */src/*.bz2 .
6625 $ ls -F
6626 gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
6627 $ for m in gdb insight
6628 do
6629 bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
6630 gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
6631 done
6632 $
6633 @end smallexample
6634
6635 @noindent
6636 Note:
6637
6638 @itemize @bullet
6639 @item
6640 A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
6641 in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
6642 can not include it in the compressed file. This is also why the release
6643 process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
6644 @end itemize
6645
6646 @subsection Sanity check the tar ball
6647
6648 Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
6649
6650 @smallexample
6651 $ bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
6652 $ cd gdb-5.2
6653 $ ./configure
6654 $ make
6655 @dots{}
6656 $ ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
6657 GNU gdb 5.2
6658 @dots{}
6659 (gdb) b main
6660 Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
6661 (gdb) run
6662 Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
6663
6664 Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
6665 734 catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
6666 (gdb) print args
6667 $1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
6668 (gdb)
6669 @end smallexample
6670
6671 @subsection Make a release candidate available
6672
6673 If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
6674
6675 @enumerate
6676 @item
6677 Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
6678 @item
6679 Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
6680 @var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
6681 process can restart.
6682 @item
6683 Make the release candidate available in
6684 @uref{ftp://sources.redhat.com/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
6685 @item
6686 Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com} and
6687 @email{gdb-testers@@sources.redhat.com} that the candidate is available.
6688 @end enumerate
6689
6690 @subsection Make a formal release available
6691
6692 (And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
6693
6694 @subsubheading Install on sware
6695
6696 Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
6697
6698 @smallexample
6699 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
6700 $ cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6701 @end smallexample
6702
6703 @noindent
6704 Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
6705 are available (e.g. keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
6706
6707 @smallexample
6708 $ cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
6709 $ rm @dots{}
6710 @end smallexample
6711
6712 @noindent
6713 Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
6714 directory:
6715
6716 @smallexample
6717 $ vi README
6718 @dots{}
6719 $ rm -f .message
6720 $ ln README .message
6721 @end smallexample
6722
6723 @subsubheading Update the web pages.
6724
6725 @table @file
6726
6727 @item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
6728 This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
6729 @itemize @bullet
6730 @item
6731 General announcement.
6732 @item
6733 News. If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
6734 earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
6735 @item
6736 Errata.
6737 @end itemize
6738
6739 @item htdocs/index.html
6740 @itemx htdocs/news/index.html
6741 @itemx htdocs/download/index.html
6742 These files include:
6743 @itemize @bullet
6744 @item
6745 Announcement of the most recent release.
6746 @item
6747 News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
6748 @end itemize
6749 These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
6750
6751 @item download/onlinedocs/
6752 You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
6753 docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}. The best way is to look in the output
6754 from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
6755 Something like:
6756
6757 @smallexample
6758 $ ~/ss/update-web-docs \
6759 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6760 $PWD/www \
6761 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
6762 gdb
6763 @end smallexample
6764
6765 @item download/ari/
6766 Just like the online documentation. Something like:
6767
6768 @smallexample
6769 $ /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
6770 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
6771 $PWD/www \
6772 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
6773 gdb
6774 @end smallexample
6775
6776 @end table
6777
6778 @subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
6779
6780 Something goes here.
6781
6782
6783 @subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
6784
6785 At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
6786 @file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
6787
6788 @subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
6789
6790 Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
6791
6792 @itemize @bullet
6793 @item
6794 @email{gdb-announce@@sources.redhat.com, GDB Announcement mailing list}
6795 @item
6796 @email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
6797 day or so to let things get out)
6798 @item
6799 @email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
6800 @end itemize
6801
6802 @subsection Cleanup
6803
6804 The release is out but you're still not finished.
6805
6806 @subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
6807
6808 In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
6809
6810 @itemize @bullet
6811 @item
6812 @file{gdb/ChangeLog}
6813 @item
6814 @file{gdb/version.in}
6815 @item
6816 @file{gdb/NEWS}
6817 @item
6818 @file{gdb/README}
6819 @end itemize
6820
6821 @subsubheading Tag the release
6822
6823 Something like:
6824
6825 @smallexample
6826 $ d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6827 $ echo $d
6828 2002-01-24
6829 $ ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
6830 $ ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
6831 @end smallexample
6832
6833 Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
6834 @value{GDBN}.
6835
6836 @subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
6837
6838 Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
6839 indicates when the release was made.
6840
6841 @subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
6842
6843 If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
6844 @kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it. Having
6845 committed all the release changes it can be set to
6846 @file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
6847 is important - it affects the snapshot process).
6848
6849 Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
6850
6851 @subsubheading Merge into trunk
6852
6853 The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
6854 trunk.
6855
6856 @subsubheading Revise the release schedule
6857
6858 Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sources.redhat.com, GDB
6859 Discussion List} with an updated announcement. The schedule can be
6860 generated by running:
6861
6862 @smallexample
6863 $ ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
6864 @end smallexample
6865
6866 @noindent
6867 The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
6868 of the most recent release.
6869
6870 Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
6871
6872 @section Post release
6873
6874 Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
6875
6876 @node Testsuite
6877
6878 @chapter Testsuite
6879 @cindex test suite
6880
6881 The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
6882 While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
6883 this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
6884 the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
6885 to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
6886
6887 The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework. The
6888 tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
6889 runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
6890
6891 @section Using the Testsuite
6892
6893 @cindex running the test suite
6894 To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
6895 testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}. This just sets up some
6896 environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script. While
6897 the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
6898 and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails. When the testsuite is
6899 finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
6900
6901 @smallexample
6902 === gdb Summary ===
6903
6904 # of expected passes 6016
6905 # of unexpected failures 58
6906 # of unexpected successes 5
6907 # of expected failures 183
6908 # of unresolved testcases 3
6909 # of untested testcases 5
6910 @end smallexample
6911
6912 To run a specific test script, type:
6913 @example
6914 make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
6915 @end example
6916 where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
6917 spaces.
6918
6919 The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
6920 conspires to keep us from this ideal. Unexpected failures indicate
6921 real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite. Expected
6922 failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
6923 hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
6924 everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
6925 being fixed in the near future. Expected failures should not be added
6926 lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
6927 Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
6928 reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
6929 catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
6930 program.
6931
6932 When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
6933 testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
6934 regressions. Note that truly complete testing would require that you
6935 run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
6936 compilers; however this is more than really necessary. In many cases
6937 testing with a single configuration is sufficient. Other useful
6938 options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
6939 host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
6940 mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
6941
6942 If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
6943 tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
6944 and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
6945 Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
6946 failure, please add a test case for it. Some cases are extremely
6947 difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
6948 in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
6949 tests for all of those.
6950
6951 DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines. However,
6952 some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
6953 the host machine are not the same. In such an environment, these scripts
6954 will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
6955
6956 @smallexample
6957 UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
6958 @end smallexample
6959
6960 @section Testsuite Organization
6961
6962 @cindex test suite organization
6963 The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}. While the
6964 testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
6965 and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
6966 handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run. The file
6967 @file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
6968 all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
6969 configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
6970 definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
6971
6972 The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
6973 subdirectories of those. The names of the test files must always end
6974 with @file{.exp}. DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
6975 in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
6976 get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
6977
6978 The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
6979 are for. Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
6980 located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
6981 execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
6982 intelligibility.
6983
6984 @table @file
6985 @item gdb.base
6986 This is the base testsuite. The tests in it should apply to all
6987 configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
6988 The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
6989 ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
6990 for prototypes).
6991
6992 @item gdb.@var{lang}
6993 Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C. Examples are
6994 @file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
6995
6996 @item gdb.@var{platform}
6997 Non-portable tests. The tests are specific to a specific configuration
6998 (host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos. Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
6999 HP-UX.
7000
7001 @item gdb.@var{compiler}
7002 Tests specific to a particular compiler. As of this writing (June
7003 1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
7004 couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
7005 imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
7006 extensions.
7007
7008 @item gdb.@var{subsystem}
7009 Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth. For
7010 instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
7011 @file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
7012 @end table
7013
7014 @section Writing Tests
7015 @cindex writing tests
7016
7017 In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
7018 should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
7019
7020 You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
7021 includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
7022 However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
7023 instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
7024 calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
7025
7026 Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
7027 necessary, such as when @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to a command.
7028
7029 The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
7030 style. Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
7031 styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
7032 instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
7033 never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
7034 uniformly.
7035
7036 @node Hints
7037
7038 @chapter Hints
7039
7040 Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
7041 appear anywhere else in the directory.
7042
7043 @menu
7044 * Getting Started:: Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
7045 * Debugging GDB:: Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7046 @end menu
7047
7048 @node Getting Started,,, Hints
7049
7050 @section Getting Started
7051
7052 @value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
7053 work on it, it can be hard to know where to start. Fortunately, if you
7054 know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
7055
7056 This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
7057 generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
7058
7059 Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
7060 comments with those functions or data structures. If you run across a
7061 function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
7062 explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
7063 free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
7064 out what the comment should say. If you find a comment which is
7065 actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
7066
7067 Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
7068 native dependent files can be in several places. Sometimes they are
7069 repeated every place the macro is defined. Sometimes they are where the
7070 macro is used. Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
7071 default definition of the macro, and the comment is there. This manual
7072 also documents all the available macros.
7073 @c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
7074 @c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
7075 @c Conditionals})
7076
7077 Start with the header files. Once you have some idea of how
7078 @value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
7079 @file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
7080 code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
7081
7082 You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
7083 enhance your understanding of it. Summarize it, translate it to another
7084 language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
7085 the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
7086 and verify your prediction, etc. If you are reading code and your eyes
7087 are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
7088 approach.
7089
7090 Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
7091 specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
7092 function with the @code{next} command. Do not use @code{step} or you
7093 will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
7094 calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
7095 (perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
7096 called) of what it does. This way you can identify which of the
7097 functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
7098 one which you are interested in. You may need to examine the data
7099 structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
7100 the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
7101 look like.
7102
7103 Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
7104 code, rather than actually stepping through it. The same general
7105 principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
7106 else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
7107 rather than worrying about all its details.
7108
7109 @cindex command implementation
7110 A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
7111 a command which invokes that feature. Suppose you want to know how
7112 single-stepping works. As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
7113 @code{step} command invokes single-stepping. The command is invoked
7114 via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
7115 which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
7116 the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
7117 @code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}. For example, the @code{step}
7118 command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
7119 display} command invokes @code{display_info}. When this convention is
7120 not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
7121 tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
7122 breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
7123
7124 @cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
7125 If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
7126 on @code{bug-gdb}. But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
7127 wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
7128 @value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
7129 Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
7130
7131 @node Debugging GDB,,,Hints
7132
7133 @section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7134 @cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
7135
7136 If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
7137 fully functional. Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
7138 Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
7139 debugged in another. Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
7140 ./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
7141 @file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
7142
7143 When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
7144 @file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
7145 gdb easier. The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
7146 in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
7147 gdb. See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
7148
7149 If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
7150 you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
7151 routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
7152 @kbd{M-.}
7153
7154 Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
7155 have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
7156
7157 @section Submitting Patches
7158
7159 @cindex submitting patches
7160 Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
7161 @value{GDBN} users. In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
7162 Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
7163 changes.
7164
7165 The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
7166 This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
7167
7168 If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
7169 or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
7170 with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
7171
7172 @cindex legal papers for code contributions
7173 The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
7174 copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
7175 of the changes to the Free Software Foundation. You can get the
7176 standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7177 and asking for it. We recommend that people write in "All programs
7178 owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7179 changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7180 etc) can be
7181 contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7182 bureaucracy and filed with the FSF. We can't start merging changes until
7183 this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7184 since we maintain it for them).
7185
7186 Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7187 feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7188 Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7189 header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7190 each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7191 needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7192 @file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}). If there are a lot of changes for a
7193 single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7194
7195 In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7196 sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7197 If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one. If you leave
7198 out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting. Etc., etc.
7199
7200 The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7201 install some of the changes. They'll be returned to you with questions
7202 or comments. If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7203 will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7204 The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7205 the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7206 being reworked. If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7207 tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7208 the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7209 acceptable.
7210
7211 If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is. But we get a lot
7212 of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7213 installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7214 reporter or the contributor could have done. Patches that arrive
7215 complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7216 they arrive. The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7217 permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7218 be for quite some time.
7219
7220 Please send patches directly to
7221 @email{gdb-patches@@sources.redhat.com, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7222
7223 @section Obsolete Conditionals
7224 @cindex obsolete code
7225
7226 Fragments of old code in @value{GDBN} sometimes reference or set the following
7227 configuration macros. They should not be used by new code, and old uses
7228 should be removed as those parts of the debugger are otherwise touched.
7229
7230 @table @code
7231 @item STACK_END_ADDR
7232 This macro used to define where the end of the stack appeared, for use
7233 in interpreting core file formats that don't record this address in the
7234 core file itself. This information is now configured in BFD, and @value{GDBN}
7235 gets the info portably from there. The values in @value{GDBN}'s configuration
7236 files should be moved into BFD configuration files (if needed there),
7237 and deleted from all of @value{GDBN}'s config files.
7238
7239 Any @file{@var{foo}-xdep.c} file that references STACK_END_ADDR
7240 is so old that it has never been converted to use BFD. Now that's old!
7241
7242 @end table
7243
7244 @include observer.texi
7245 @raisesections
7246 @include fdl.texi
7247 @lowersections
7248
7249 @node Index
7250 @unnumbered Index
7251
7252 @printindex cp
7253
7254 @bye
This page took 0.2049 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.